€¦ · preface to vol. xl following is a synopsis of the documents con tain ed in the present...
TRANSCRIPT
Z. %2/
The j esuit Relations andAl l iedDocuments
TRAVEL S A N D E XPL ORA T ION S
OF TH E JESU ITMISS IONA R IESIN N EW FRAN CE
1610 - 1791
TH E OR IGIN A L FRE NCH,LA TIN
,A N D ITAL
IA N TEXTS,WITH E N GL ISH TRA N SLA
TIONS A N D NOTE S ; IL LU STRA TE D BY
PORTRA ITS ,MA PS
,A N D FA CSIMILE S
EDITED BY
REUBEN GO LD THWAITESthe State H istorica l Society of Wisconsin
Vol . XL
HURONS , LOWER CANADA, IROQUO IS : 1653
t he JBun ows Œtotb€æ
Company, PU B L ISH E R S , M DCCC -XCIX
COPYRIGH T , 1898
B Y
T H E BURROW S BROT H E RS Co
RIGH T S RE SE RVE D
EDITORIAL STAFF
E ditor
Tran sl ators
E ditor
Bibliographical Adviser
RE U BE N GOL D THWAIT E S
F1N LOW A L E XAN DE R
PE R CY FAVOR BICKN E L L
CRAWFOR D LIN DSAY
W IL L IAM PR ICE
E MMA HE L E N BLAIR
VICTOR HU GO PA LTS IT S
CONTENTS OF VOL. XL
PR E FACE TO VOLU ME XL jDOCUME N T SLXXXII I . Breve R elatione d ’
a l cvn e missioni
de ’
PP . della Compagnia di Giesù
n e l l a N uoua Francia . [R emain
der of Part I I I . , completing the
document . ] Francesca Gz‘
oseppe
B ressa n z‘
; Macerata , Ita ly, j u ly19 , 1653
LXXXIV . R elation de ce qvi s’est passé en
la Novve l l e France , de
puis 1E té de l’
A nn ée 1652 .
in fques à l’
E té de 1’Année 1653 .
Francois l e Mercier; Quebec , Oc
tober 29, 1653
B IBL IOGRAPH ICAL DATA : VOL U ME XLNOT E S
l LLUSTRATIONS TO VOL. XL
1. Facsimile of photograph , sta tue of Isaac
Jogues , Fran tz‘
spieæ
I I . Photographic facsimile of title-page , _
R e
l a tion'
of 1652 — 53
PREFACE TO VOL . XL
Following is a synopsis of the documents con
tain ed in the present volume
LXXXI I I . B ressan i'
s B reve R el a tione , begun in
Vol . XXXVI I I . , and continuing through Vol .
XXX IX . ,is here completed . He relates — abridg
ing from the R ela t ion of 165O — the martyrdoms of
the Huron missionaries , Garnier and Chaban e l , and
gives sketches of their lives . The final chapter of
this document recounts the desolation of the Huron
country,and removal of the Huron mission to Ke
bek .
” This also is largely compiled from R ague
neau ’ s R ela tion of 1650 . B ressan i concludes with an
expression of the hope still entertained by the mis
sion aries that , at some future time , they may resume
their labors among the Western savages .
LXXX IV . This is the R ela tion of 1652. — 53 , sent
by the new superior , François le Mercier , and datedat Quebec , October 29 , 1653 . The first chapter
,
written by the Paris editor , recounts the capture
by an E nglish vessel of the ship on which wasconveyed Father du P eron and the Canadian mail
to France . The Father ’ s papers are seized and
carelessly fiung about by the soldiers ; he rescueswhat he can , but some are lost , and the R ela tion forthis year is not , in consequence , complete .
P REFA CE TO VOL . XL
Le Mercier mentions the unusual aid sent to Mont
real this year — a hundred artisans , who are n ot
only versed in their trades , but brave in war . The
Fathers residing there recommend special devotionsto the Virgin
,for aid in repelling the Iroquois ; as a
result, God ’ s hand was so heavy upon the enemy
that they sued for peace .
Three R ivers is harassed all summer by attacks of
the enemy,which are graphically described — espe
cial ly an attempt to capture that village by surprise ,which is foiled by the vigilance and resolution of the
French . The Iroquois finally begin friendly nego
tiation s , and go away , leaving hostages with the
French for the return of Father P oncet and a comp anion , who were captured , a few days before , by
on e of the Iroquois bands . His seizure and deliver
ance are described — mainly as written by himself ,at the command of his superior . The two French
prisoners are taken to the Iroquois country , where
they are tormented— in like manner , but not as
cruelly , as had been j ogues and B ressan i . P oncet
is given , after a fewdays , to an Old woman in place
of her brother ; he is then treated with the utmost
kindness , and adopted into the family . His young
French companion is , however , burned to death .
Soon afterward , P oncet is released by his captors ,who take him first to Fort Orange (Albany), to obtainsome E uropean garments from the Dutch , who
treat him most generously and hospitably ; then
to Three R ivers , where he is surrendered to his
countrymen .
Le Mercier now relates in detail the preliminarynegotiations for peace— with the accompanying
PRE FA CE TO VOL . XL
speeches,presents , and œrem on ies - between the
Iroquois and the French This result has been
secured by the providence of God , and , next , by the
influence of Father Poncet . All the five tribes j oin
in this peace — the Mohawks consenting last of all .
Father Poncet returns , somewhat later , and confirm s
the statements of the Iroquois envoys that their
people desire peace ; the ratification of the treaty will
be made in the following spring .
In November , 1652 , a party of Sillery Algonkinshad captured some prisoners of a tribe not named ,but probably on e of the Abenaki tribes . A S a result
of this event , a treaty of peace is made between this
distant people and those of Sillery , which also is
described in full . Le Mercier recounts the injuriessu fïered by the French and their savage allies fromthe Iroquois war which has just ended . The furtrade , which had amounted to two or three hundred
thousand livres annually , has been ruined ; ! for a
year , the Montreal warehouse has not bought a single
Beaver-skin from the Savages . In consequence ,the whole country is in distress . News is broughtfrom the far West , that the Algonkins and H uronswho have fled thither from the Iroquois are prepar
ing to come down to the French next year for trade ;and several young Frenchmen plan to go to these
tribes for the same purpose . These prospects are
especially enticing , because the beaver and other fur
bearing animals , having been left undisturbed forseveral years , have multiplied enormously ; and arich harvest of furs is consequently expected . A n
other resource Of Canada is in its fertile soil ; andagriculture there is now becoming successful . Theeel-fishery is also highly productive , and enables the
P RE FA CE TO VOL . XL
people to live when all else fails ; other fish also
abound indeed , this country is the Kingdom of
water and of fish .
” The climate is very healthfulan especial blessing .
”
The peace made with the Iroquois , detailed in the
preceding Chapters , fil l s the missionaries with joy ,and great hope for the extension of their field of
labor . Le Mercier finds especial encouragement in
the prospect of establishing a mission in the enemy’s
country , on or near Lake Ontario . The Onondagas
invite the j esuits to do this . The final chapter
summariz ing several letters from Canada which havecome to the Paris editor— mentions that the Hurons
who took refuge at Quebec have cleared and planted
300 arpents of land , thus providing food for them
selves . Some of them have been clothed through
gifts received from France , from friends of the mis
sion . Several instances of the piety of these
neophytes are recounted , as also of their virtuousresistance to temptation .
R . G.T .
MA D ISON , W1s. , February, 1899.
LxxxIl l (concluded)
B RESSANI’
S B REVE RELATIONE
MAC ERATA : HEREDI D ’AGOSTINO GRISE ] , 1653
This document, commenced in Volume XXXVIIl . , and
continued throughout Volume XXXIX. ,is here completed.
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S ] ÉS U I TE S [VOL . 40
[ 1 14 i . e . , 1 16] CAPITOLO SE STO .
MORTE D E L P . CAR LO GAR N IE R .
NE LLE m ontagne della n ation e del Tabacco
hau euam o due Mifiion i , in ciafcun a due de ’
n oftri Padri . La più e fpofi a à i nemici fi chiamaua di San Giouann i , come anche la Terra princi
pale . Qui hau eua fparfi molti fudori , qui bifogn aua
fpargefie il fangue il P . Carlo Garnier operario inu itto
di qu efi e Miffion i . Qualche prigione fuggitiuo dal
paefe de nemici ci banena auu ertiti de ’ lor difegn i
d ’
inueftire ,O l a n 0ftra H ola , 0 le montagne di San
Giouann i , e li paefan i fi tennero alcuni di in ordine
per riceu erl i coraggiofam en te , e come fperauan o ,
facilmente disfarl i , era per altro gente di cu0re ,
auue z z a alla guerra . Ma an n oiandofi fin alm en te di
tanto afpe ttare , fi rifol fero d ’ andargli incontro per
afial irl i i primi , e forpren derl i . Partirmo à que ft0 fine
li 5. di D ecembre , ma per altra Itrada , che quella ,
che prefero i nemici; i quali hau en do vicino al paefe
prefi due prigioni , fepper0 da e ifi come era sfornito
delle forze di quelli , che erano vfciti per in con trarl i .
E per non perder ’ vn occafion e si fau oreuol e s ’ affret
tan0 , e li 7 . di Decembre circa le 20 . hore ,fi prefen
tan0 alle porte di S an Giouan n i si fubitam en te ,che
10 fpauen to hauend0 occupato il cu0re degli habitan ti ,
in vece di refiftere , pen forn o alla fuga , ma inutile
L E S R ELA TION S D E S_]ÉS U I TE S [VOL. 40
per la maggior parte , che furono , O fatti prigioni , o
vccifi di ferro , 0 di fuoco , che accefero da per tutto
per più sb [r]igarfi , temendo il ritorno de” guerrieri .
E fercitorn o pero in poco tempo ftrane crudeltà , maf
fim e con i putti , chè ftaccauan o dalle mammelle delle
madri per gettar vini nel fuoco . Il Padre Carlo
Garnier era in i all ’ hora folo de n oftri , nè volle vdirparlare di fuggire , come qualche amico gli con figl iaua .
Volle come gli altri morire , am m in iftran do i S acra
menti , e fortando tutti alla coftan z a nella Fede ,in vita , in morte . E 10 fece fin tanto , che riceuè da
nemici vn ’ archibugiata con tre palle , l’
vn a delle
quali lo feri nello ftom aoo , l’ altra nel petto , la terza
[ I 15 i . e . , 1 17] in vn a cofcia , che 10 gettoà terra , don e
non m an cô di l euar le mani al Cielo , e dar fegn i di
gran diuotion e , e poco doppo , come fuegl iandofi da
vn profondo fonn o ,e riguardando in giro , vidde vn
ferito come lui,al quale penso poter dare qualche
aiuto fpiritual e; onde prefe dalla carità , e dal zelo , che
gli ardena nel petto, nuoue forze , fi leu0, e fece mezzo
inginocchioni due paf fi per auu icin arfegl i ; ma rica
dendo d ’
vua ftran a maniera , gli bifognô in i ferm arfi ,
fin che riprefo animo fece vn fecondo , e terzo sforzo
per morir nell ’ e fercitio di quella carità , che in vita
haueua fem pre e fercitata . N on fappiam o altro parti
co l arità della fua morte , perche vn a buona Chrift ian a ,
che era fpe ttatrice di quanto qu i s’
e detto , fù doppo
que fto , ferita d’ vn colpo d ’ accetta in tefta , cadde , e
fù in i l afciata per morta . Ma per dinin volere neguari , e ci narro quanto di fopra . Ma il corpo del
B R E S SA N I’
S RE LA TIOIV, 1653
fl ight . But this was in vain for the greater part , who
were either taken prisoners or slain by the sword ,o r by fire ,
— which they kindled on all sides in order
to expedite their work , fearing the return of the
warriors . They therefore practiced , in a short time ,savage cruelties ,— especially upon the children ,whom they tore from their mothers ’ breasts in order
to throw them alive into the fire . Father Charles
Garnier was at that time alone there of ours ; n or
would he hear mention of fiee ing , as some friend
advised him to do . He wished , like the others , to
d ie while administering the S acraments , and exhort
ing all to constancy in the Faith , both in life and in
d eath . And he did so until be received from theenemies an arquebus shot with three balls ,— one of
which wounded him in the stomach , another in the
breast , the third [ 1 15 i . e . , 1 17] in his thigh . This
threw him to the ground , where he did n ot fail to
lift his hands to Heaven , and to give signs of deepdevotion ; and soon afterward— as it were , rousing
himself from a profound sleep , and looking about
him - he saw on e wounded like himself , to whom
h e thought he could give some spiritual aid . From
the charity and zeal which glowed in his breast he
gained , then , new strength ; he arose , and took , half
kneeling , two steps in order to approach him ; but
falling back in a strange manner , he was obliged to
stop there until , recovering strength , he made a second
and a third effort to die in the exercise of that charity
which he had always practiced in life . We know no
other particu lars of his death , because the good
C hristian woman , who was a Spectator of what has
been told , was then wounded in the head with ah atchet-blow , fell , and was left there for dead . But
,
L E S RE LA TION S D E S j ÉS UI TE S [VOL. 40
Padre haueua oltre le ferite dell ’ archibugiata , l a
tefta aperta alle due tempie fin o al cerue l l o . I due
Padri , che erano nella vicina Miffion e riceueron o
tutta la notte i pou eri Chriftian i fuggitiu i , e la m at
tina feguen te andorno à S . Giouan n i per fepe l l ir il
corpo del lor caro compagno , don e viddero con gli
occhi propri j gli effetti della crudeltà del Barbaro
nemico . Cercarono quel benedetto cadau ero vnpezzo in vano , ma in fine lo ritr0uorn o nudo tra.
molti altri mezzo arroftiti , n e l’
haurebbero conofciuto ,
tanto era contrafatto , fenza l’ aiuto d ’ alcuni buoni
N eofiti , che foli diftin fero da gli altri il loro caro
Padre . Per fepe l l irl o i due Padri fi fpogl iorn o
ciafcun o d ’
vn a parte delle fue vefti , e fe ne ritor
n aron o fubito 00 i compagni , che gli afi‘rettauan o per
tema de nemici . R itornarono due di doppo , i guer
rieri di S . Giouan n i , i quali auuert iti dal fangue , e
da ’
cadaueri de ’ più deboli (che i nemici vccideuan o
per itrada , come impaccio pericol ofo) del l or difaftro ,
e paflaron o fecondo il lor coftum e , e degli antichi la
giornata in vn profondo fil en tio , profirati à terra
fenza alzar gli occhi , e quafi fenza moto come ftatue
di marmo,0 di bronzo
, l afciando alle donne le la
grime , e’
l pianto .
Il P . Carlo Garnier era n atiuo di Parigi . Moriall ’ e tà di 44 anni , 2 5. de quali haueua fpefi nella
Compagnia,e 13 . in qu eñe m iifion i . Dalla pu eritia
haueua hauu ti gran fen tim en ti di deuotion e , m af fim e
ve rfo la B eatifs . Vergine , che chiam au a fem pre col
nome di Madre . H au eua fatto voto di difen der fin o
B R E S S A N I’S RELA TION 1653
by divine will , she recovered from it , and related to
us the foregoing . But the Father ’ s body had , besidesthe arquebus wounds
,the head cut open , from both
temples even to the brain . The two Fathers whowere in the neighboring Mission received the poorfugitive Christians all night ; and on the . following
morning they went to S t . j ean , in order to burythe body of their dear companion ,— where they saw
with their own eyes the effects of the Barbarianenemy ' s cruelty . They looked for that blessed body
in vain,for a time ; but at last they recovered it ,
naked , among many others which were half roasted
nor would they have known it , so disfigured it
was ,— but for the help of some good Neophytes,who
alone distinguished their dear Father from the others .
In order to bury him , the two Fathers both strippedthemselves of a part of their own clothing ; and theyimmediately returned thence with their companions
,
who , for fear of the enemies , hastened away . The
warriors of St . j ean returned two days later ; and ,being informed of their disaster by the blood and the
corpses of the weakest (whom the enemies killed bythe way , as a dangerous encumbrance), spent , accord
ing to their custom and that of the ancients , the day
in a profound silence , prostrated to the earth with
ou t lifting their eyes , and almost without motion ,like statues o f marble or of bronze ,— leaving tears
and lamentation to the women .
Father Charles Garnier was a native of Paris . Hedied at the age of 44 years , 2 5 of which he had spent
in the S ociety , and 13 in these missions . From boy
hood , he had had profound sentiments of devotion ,especially toward the Most Blessed Virgin
,whom he
always called by the name of Mother .
” He had
L E S R E L A TIONS D E S ] ÉS UITE S [VOL . 40
alla morte la fua purifiim a Con cettion e , della quale era
diuotifllm o , e mori la vigilia di queûa feita per
andarla à celebrar più fol en n em ëte in Cielo .
[ 1 16 i . e . ,1 18] E fi endo giou an e tra n oftri Conu ittori
nel Collegio di Parigi , riceueua ogni mefe dal Padre
alcuni danari per fua r icreation e . E gli li riferuaua
per il giorno della vacanza , nel quale hauu ta licenza
d ’
vfcire , in vece di con fum arl i al giuoco , li portaua
à i prigioni . Vn di ne compro vn libro cattiuo per
abbruciarl o , accio non nocee à n eflun o . E fie ndo
c on alcuni compagni , che en troron o in vn ’
hofteria
per farn i col ation e , egli per n on fare contro le regole
della Congregation e , fi tenne alla porta come vn
laquay afpe ttan do fin o , che haueflero fin ito .
Il Signor fuo Padre con fegn an dol o al Padre Pronin
cial e per la Compagnia gli difïe , che gli dana vn
figl io , che n on haueua mai com m efia vua minima
difobedien z a . La fua m ode ftia veramente Angelicalo faceua dal principio fte fîo del fuo N ou itiato pro
porre à tutti per e fem pio . I Superiori non 10 vole
n ano riceu ere nella Compagnia , e molto meno in u iare
nel Canada fenza con fen fo del Padre , che fortemente
vi repugn aua , ma la perfeu eran te coftan z a d’
anni
intieri ottenne il tutto . N e l viaggio di mare , che
fece per pafïare alla n uou a Francia , fece con vn gran
zelo , e prudenza notabili conn erfion i , tra l' altre d ’ vn ’
huom o fenza cofcien z a , n e religione , che banena
pa li ati più di dieci anni fenza con fefli on e . H aueua
per que fto vn a gratia particolare , anche più marani
g l iofa per la conu erfion e de’ Barbari
,de ’ quali fapeua
B R E S SA N I'
S R E LA TION , 1653
made a vow to defen d her immaculate Conception ,to which he was extremely devoted even till death ;and he died on the eve of this feast , in order to go
and celebrate it more solemnly in Heaven . [ I 16 i . e . ,
1 18] While a young man among our Students at the
College of Paris , he received every month from his
Father some money for his recreation . He reservedit for the day of the vacation ; when , having obtained
leave to go abroad , instead of spending it in sport s ,he carried it to the prisoners . On e day he bought
with it an immoral book , in order to burn it , so that
it should harm no on e . Being with some com pan
ions who entered an inn , to make a banquet there ,he , so as n ot to act against the rules of the Congrega
tion , stayed at the door like a footman , waiting till
they had fin ished .
The Signor, his Father , on committing him to theFather Provincial for the Society , told him that hegave him a son who had never commit ted the slight
est disobedience . His modesty , truly Angelic , causedhim , at the very beginning of his Novitiate , to be set
before all as an example . The Superiors did not
wish to receive him into the Society , and much less
to send him to Canada , without the consent of his
Father , who strongly opposed it ; but the perseveringconstancy of whole years obtained it all . On the sea
voyage which he made in crossing to new France,he
effected , with great zeal and prudence , notable con
versions ,— among others , that of a man without
conscience or religion , who had spent more than
ten years without confession . He had a special grace
for this , and a still more wonderful on e for the
conversion of the Barbarians ,—whose language heperfectly knew , and whose hearts he gained by a
L E S R E LA TION 5 D E S ] ÉS UI TE S [VOL. 40
perfettamente la lingua , e guadagn aua con mille
in duñrie i cuori . Molti affermano efierfi mutati , e
rifol u ti di con n ertirfi folo in riguardarlo . E ra huom o
d ’
vua profonda hum il tà , che tutto che profefio de 4 .
voti , hauen do ogni cofa eminente , fi ftim aua il
minimo di tutti anche n on Sacerdoti , e fen tendofi
lodare , fi giudicaua caftigato da Dio , e ne fen tiua
pena fen fibil e ; onde per rimedio fcopriua fpefio à
chi lo l odaua i difetti , che pen faua potergli dare auer
fion e dalla fua perfon a . N ell ’ oration e tra le ocon
pation i le più diftrattiu e era raccol tifiîm o , e tutto
fuoco dal principio fin o alla fine . O ltre il dormir à
terra , cofa in i commune a tutti i n oftri Mifiion an ti , fiferu iua d ’
vn a cintura di ferro con fte l l ette d’ acciaio ,
e con 1’ iftefle fi difcipl in aua . Il viu ere non folo era
di cofe infipidifiîm e , ma parchifiim o , per fam e limo
fina a famelici , m aflim e ne ’ due vl tim i anni , che vifîe ,
ne ’ quali parte per n ecefll tà , parte per edifica tion e ,
ancorche de l itiofam en te a l l euato in cafa nobile , men
tre m ercena r ij in dom opa tr is abuna’abât pa n ib
9 fi ridufie
à priuarfi fin o del gran turchefco , vn ico [ 1 17 i . e . , 1 19]cibo del paefe , con ten tan dofi di qualche ghianda , 0
di qualche amara radice cotta nell ’ acqua fem pl ice ,
fenza fale , fenza pane , 0 altro companatico . T re di
prima , che m oriffe , il Superiore della Mifiion e glihaueua fcritto , che vede ffe , fe per rim etterfi vn poco
non era e fpedien te di ritirarfi alquanto da trauagl i
eccefliu i , ne’ quali viueua , e 1 1nu itaua à quefto fine
alla refiden z a fifla , detta di Santa Maria . E cco vn a
parte della rifpofta . E vero , dice , che patifco qual
L E S R E L A TION S D E S j ÉS U1TE 5 [VOL . 40
che cofa per ragione della fame , che è qu i grade ,
vn iu erfal e , ma non q ue ad m ortem per gratia di D io ,
nè lo fpirito , nè il corpo perdono il l or vigore , non
temo tanto la fame , quanto temerei , che abbando
nando le mie pecorelle , in qu eûi tempi di m iferie ,
e pericoli di guerra , don e io fono più che mai n ece f
fario , non m an cafli all ’ occafion e , che Dio mi porge
rebbe di perdermi per lui , rendendomi indegno de
fu oi fauori &c . Io hô afiai cura di me , e fe mi
trouafii in vera n eceffità di ricuperar le forze , non
mancherei di partire per S . Maria , e li en do difpoftodi abbandonare ogni cofa più tofto , che l ’ obedienza .
Ma altro , che lei n on mi ftaccarà dalla Croce , doue
la d1u1na bontà mi hà attaccato . Quel che habbiam o
detto del fuo interiore , è depofit ion e di chi 1’
ha
con fe tïato , e trattato intimamente p1u di 12 . anni , il
quale aggiunge quefi e parole . Io poffo dire in verità ,
che in quefti 12 . anni , e più , ne’ quali mi apriua il
fuo cuore , come à D io , n on credo , che fuor del fon n o
ftefïe vn a l ol a hora fenza defiderij ardenti di crefcere
in virtù , e di prom oueru i il proffim o . Tutto il re fto
gli era indif‘
f erente , parenti , amici , ripofo , con fol a
ti0ni,pene
,fatiche &c . D io gli era ogni cofa , e fuor
di Dio ogni cofa gli era niente . Ma quel , che fegue
e d ’
vn o de fuoi compagni , che ad iftan z a del Supe
riore cosi ne fcriue . V . R . mi ordina di fcriuergl i
quel , che SÔ del Padre Garnier . Io pen fo , general
mente parlando , che hau e lîe tutto le virtù in gradoeminente . In quattro anni , che io fono itato fuo
compagno non gli hO vifto fare m anœm en to alcuno ,
B R E S SA N 1’
S R E L A TION, 1653
Here is a part of his answer . It is true , he
says,that I suffer something on account of hunger ,
which is great and universal here ; but non usque ad
m or tem ,— by the grace of God , neither the spirit n or
the body loses its vigor . I do not fear hunger as
much as I would fear that , by abandoning my sheep
in these times of misery and dangers of war , wherein
I am more than ever necessary , I might be lacking ,in the opportunity which God should extend to meof losing myself for him , by rendering myself
unworthy of his favors , etc . I take sufficient care
of myself ; and if I found myself in real need of
recuperating my strength , I would n ot fail to leave
for Ste . Marie , being disposed to abandon everything rather than obedience . But nothing else shall
remove me from the Cross to which the divine goodness has attached me .
” What we have said of his
inward feelings is the testimony of that on e who
heard him in confession , and intimately dealt with
him , for more than 12 years , who adds these words :I may say in truth that , in these 12 years and
more during which he opened his heart to me as toGod , I do not believe that , outside of sleep
,he
remained a single hour without ardent desires of
increasing in virtue , and of advancing his neighbortherein . E verything else was indifferent to him
,
relatives , friends , rest , consolations , pains , fatigues ,etc . God was everything to him ; and , outside of
God , everything was naught to him .
” But thatwhich follows is from one of his companions
,
1 whoat the request of the Superior thus writes of him :
Your R everence orders me to write to you what Iknow of Father Garnier . I think
,generally speak
ing , that he had all the virtues in an eminent degree .
L E S R ËL A T] ON S D E S ] ÉS UITE S [VOL . 40
che fufie direttamente contro qualche virtù . Cer
caua in ogni cofa Dio , e non fe fte ffo ,n
‘
e hô mai
potuto giudicare , che opera iÏe per principio di natura ,
era ardente,e pieno di zelo per il progrefio non folo
della fua,ma di tutto qu efte m ifiîon i ; nella din erfità
degli accidenti fem pre l’
ift efio ,fenza turbarfi , ma
perfettamente conforme al dinin volere , al che in
qu efi i vl tim i tempi particolarmente fi ftudiaua . R if
pe ttaua tutti grandemente . Mai biafim aua m anco i
più in efcu fabil i , [ 1 18 i . e . ,120] e fe gli s
’
accu faua
alcun Barbaro alla fua cura com m efio,0 l o
_
fcu faua ,
fe poteua ,ouero taceua . Tutti i fuoi penfieri erano
di prom ouere in quelle m iffion i la gloria di D io , e
qu e ita è l’
vn ica cofa , che mi raccomando per l’ altra
vita,mentre io itano per morire qu efti anni addietro .
N on fapeua quafi niente delle cofe d’
E uropa , e le
unone , che ne vdiua vn a volta l’ anno fubito le dim en
t icana , intento à quell’
'U îtû necefl
‘
a r iû, per il quale”
haueua abbandonato ogni co l a . B ifogn aua quafi
sforz arl o à rifpon dere alle lettere , m aflim e de ’
fuoi ,
temendo di togliere a ’ Barbari vn momento di quel”
tempo , che gli hanoua in teram ëte con fàcrato . Vn a
delle peggiori n uoue , che riceu e fïe era la morte di
qualche 0 adulto , o putto fenza B attefim o , e temena
fem pre di n on e iïern e in colpa . L ’
hô vifto partire—per viaggi afïai longhi in tempi faftidiofifil m i , eipo
n endofi à pericolo di p erderfi in qualche fium e , 0
pre cipitio per aiu tar qualche anima , fenza poterlo in
alcun modo , 0 ritenere , 0moderare . S i accom odaua
pero grandemente a’ compagni , mai m’
hà detta vn ‘
a
B R E S SA N 1'S RE LA TION , 1653
In the four years during which I was his companion ,I did not see him commit any fault that directly
opposed any virtue . He sought God in everything ,and not himself
,nor have I ever been able to judge
that he acted upon the principle of nature . He was
ardent and full of zeal for the progress not only of
his own,but of all these missions ; in the variety of
events,always the same , without vexing himself ,
but perfectly conformed to the divine will ,— whereto
in these last times he especially applied himself. He
greatly respected all . He never blamed a failing ,
even the most inexcusable ; [ I 18 i . e . ,120] and if some
Barbarian , committed to his charge , accused him
self to him , either he excused him , if he could , or
else was silent . All his thought was to promote inthose missions the glory of God ; and this is the only
thing which he recommended to me for the other
life ; while I remained to die these years behind
him . He knew almost nothing of the afiairs of
E urope , and the news that be heard of them ,once a
year , he promptly forgot , intent on that unum neces
sa r iam ,for which he had forsaken everything . It was
almost necessary to compel him to answer letters,
especially from his friends ,— he fearing to take away
from the Barbarians a moment of that time which he
had entirely consecrated to them . One of the worsttidings that he received was the death of either some
adult or a child without Baptism ; and he always
feared to be at fault therein . I have seen him start
on quite long journeys in most disagreeable weather,
exposing himself , in order to aid some soul , to the
danger of losing his life in some river or chasm,
without being able in any way to restrain or to
moderate him . Ye t he thoroughly adapted himself
L E S RELA TIONS D E S j E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
parola bru fca , pigl iaua fem pre il peggio , per auuan
taggiarm i in ogni cofa , vol end0m i perfuadere , che
ci0 10 con ten taua più . E ra e fattiffim o nell’ offer
nanza delle regole , e ten eriifim o nell ’ obedienza .
P er occupatiflim o , che foffe , mai nè 1afciaua , n è
fm inu iua il tempo dell ’ oration e , efame , 0 lettura
fpiritua l e , im piegan douî la notte quando era impedito
il giorno à cofto del ripofo , e del fon n o . La purità
in lui andaua al pari della m odeftia , l’
vua , e l’ altra
veramente Angelica , ma niente hô ammirato più , chela fua profonda hum il tà &c . Quefto fuo compagno
huom o molto virtuofo era anche fuo Con fefiore , a
ou i quando erano in fiem e conforme il coftum e de
n oftri Mif fion an ti , in quei paefi fi con fefiau a ogni di .
SO, che qu eûe cofe parranno à qual chun o forfi troppo
minute , ma non à chi sà in che confifte la vera virtù ,à chi le pe farà col pe fo del Santuario . L
’
habbiam
vifto con infermi fchifi sù le fpal l e fare le 3 . e 4 .
miglia per guadagn arl i à D io; curare per molto tem
po , e più volte il di , piaghe fchifofifiim e , in cura
bi1i , delle quali i parenti proprij del patiente
haueuan o horrore , con volto feren o , e pieno di carità ,
per guadagnar quelle anime , che per e lïer in corpi
cadauerofi non erano coftato meno dell’ altre al loro
R edentore ; e più s’
auu icin auan o alla morte , più
era diligente in feru irl i per il pericolo , e n ecefiità
maggiore ; fare le 30 . e 40 . miglia à piedi fie '
gran
caldi della Rate in luoghi pericol ofiflim i de nemici ,
correndo dietro vn a guida , per [ 1 19 i . e . , 12 1] poter
trouar in vita , e battezzare qualche moribondo , 0
BRE S SAN I ’
S RELA TION , 1653
to companions ; he never sa id an abrupt word to me ;he always took the worst , for the sake of giving me
the advantage in everything , trying to persuade me
that this better contented him . He was extremely
punctual in the observance of the rules , and most
sensitive in obedience . N o matter how much occu
pied he was,he never omitted or lessened the time
of prayer , examination , or Spiritual reading ,— employing therein the night
,when he was hindered by
day,at the cost of rest and sleep . Purity in him
went apace with modesty , both truly Angelic ; but Iadmired nothing more than his profound humility ,
etc . This his companion , a very virtuous man , wasdl so his Confessor ,— to whom , when they were
together,agreeably to the custom of our Missionaries
in those countries , he confessed every day . I know
that these things will perhaps appear to some too
minute ; but not to him who knows what true virtueconsists in , and to him who shall weigh it with the
weight of the Sanctuary . We have seen him with
vile sick people on his shoulders , going 3 and 4 miles ,to gain them for God ; tending a long while , and
many times a day,most fil thy and incurable wounds ,
o f which the patient ’ s own relatives had a horror,
with a countenance serene and full of charity . This
he did in order to gain those souls,which
,though
in cadaverous bodies , had n ot cost less than the others
to their R edeemer . And,the nearer they approached
death , the more diligent he was in serving them ,
because of the danger and greater necessity,— mak
ing 30 and 40 miles on foot,in the great heat of
summer , in places full of danger from the enemies ;running behind a guide , so that [ 1 19 i . e . , 12 1] he
could find alive and baptize some dying man, or some
L E S R E LA TION S D E S ] ÉS UITE S [VOL . 40
qualche prigione già condannato al fuoco , hà in
fim il i occafion i pa iÏata la notte fm arrito n e'
bofchi tra
le n eu i , e’
l ghiaccio . N e l tempo della contagione ci
chiudeuan o , come habbiam detto , da per tutto le
porte . Ma il fuo zelo non temena d ’
e fporfi à mille
pericoli , per penetrare doue fperaua di poter conqu i
itare vua fola anima à Dio . R icorreua con gran
fiducia à gli Angeli di quelle contrade , e ne pr0uauaeu iden te foccorfo . Qualche moribondo gli hà viftoal lato vn be l l iffim o giouan e , che l
’
accom pagn aua ,
e fortaua l’ ammalato à profittare dell
’
iftru ttion i del
Padre . H au eua vn ’
in cl in ation e particolare per ipiù abbandonati , e per fiero , ingrato , che in con
trafie vn Barbaro gli m of‘
traua vn ’ amore più che
materno per ridurlo à Dio . Il fuo zelo non banena
alcun termine , afpiraua à n uou e terre , ad altre
n ation i più remote , hau eua defiderato di ca fcar
nelle mani de gl ’ H irochefi , per hauer occafion e di
predicargli la Fede , ma D io gli concee il primo
fenza il fecondo . E ra Prato in tutte le m ifiion i degli
H uron i ; n’
haueua incominciata più d’
vn a , e tra l’al
t re quella doue mori . Non hau eua alcun’
attacco
n é à luoghi , n é à perfon e , n e à fuoi fte ffi trauagl i ;
ogn’
occupation e gli era vgual e , purche gli ven ifïe
da Superiori , che gli hanno fatto tal’ hora l afciare
le m ifil on i , don e hau eua il fuo cuore per tirar come
vn Caua l l o nelle neni pefi n ece fïarij ; per feru ir gli
ammalati ; per far la cucina , portar legna , e cercar le
2 0 . e 30 . miglia lontano delle l am bru fche per fam e
il vino per la Me li a . In tutte qu efte cofe era eguale
à fe fte lïo , cioè fem pre feren o , e contento , tronando
Dio da per tutto .
N on fa rem o (diceua) m a i n ien te per la j a l a l e del l'
a n im e , j e D io non à con nOi, e non c’
appl ica p er m ez z o de
Super ior i,'
e cerca r qua lche cof a con determ ina ti0ne , e
cerca re j e s‘
l efi‘
o In vn a parola , tutti quelli , che 10
con ofceuan o 10 ftim auan o vn Santo .
is , always serene and contented , finding God every
We sha l l never (he said) a'
o a nything f or the sa lva tion
of sou ls , if God is not with us , and does not apply us
d eterm ina tion is to seek one’
s self . In a word , all those
who knew him accounted him a S aint .
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
CAPITOLO SE TTIMO .
MOR T E D E L P . N ATAL E CH A B A N E L .
V il fe fto , che mori in que fta Miflion e di morteviolenta come gli altri , non pero da m edefim i
hom icidi , come è più probabile . Il P . Natale
era compagno del P . Garnier ; ma due di prima dell’
arrino de nemici era per ordine de ’
Superiori partitoda [ 12 0 i . e . , 12 2 ] S an Giouan n i per la refiden z a fiffa
di Santa Maria , parte per la fame , che era e ftrem a
in San Giouann i , onde difiicilm en te poteua nutrire
due foggetti , parte per non e fporre in quei tempi , e
luoghi per icol ofifiîm i due perfon e , don e baftaua vn a ;
ma Dio , che gli banena accompagnati in vita , non li
volle feparar alla morte . R iuen en do dunque done
l ’ obedienza lo richiam aua , dopo 18 . 0 2 0 . miglia
di ca ttiu if fim a ftrada , fù foprapre fo dalla notte ne’
bofchi , in compagnia di 7 . 0 8 . chriftian i H uron i , i
quali fi an chi dal viaggio s ’ addormirono . Il Padre
folo vegl iaua in oration e . Verio la mezza notte intende diu erfe voci , e gridi con fufi , parte dell
’ armata
vitt0riofa , che banena l’
ifte fïo di prefa la Terra diS . Giouan n i , parte de poueri prigioni , che can tauan o
fecondo i loro coftum i , canzoni di guerra . Il Padre
fuegl ia i compagni , i quali fubito fe ne fuggono nel
più fecreto de ’
bofchi , chi qua, chi là , sl on tan and0fi
dalla ftrada , che 1’ inimico tenena . Que fti fuggitiui
BRE S SAN I ’
S R E LA TION , 1653
CHAPTE R SE VE NTH .
DE ATH OF FATHE R N OËL CH A B A N E L .
E was the sixth who died in this Mission byviolent death
,- like the others , yet , as is most
probable , n ot by the same murderers . Father
Noël was a companion of Father Garnier ; but twodays before the arrival of the enemies he had started ,by order of the Superiors , from [ 12 0 i . e 12 2 ] Saint
j ean for the fixed residence of Sainte Marie ,— part lyby reason of the famine , which was extreme at Saint
j ean , for which reason it could with difiîcu l ty support two persons in charge ; partly in order not to
expose , in those most dangerous times and places ,two persons , where one was enough ; but God , who
had made them companions in life , did not choose to
separate them in death . R eturning therefore whither
obedience was recalling him,he was , after 18 or 20
miles of exceedingly bad road , overtaken by night
in the woods , in company with 7 or 8 Huron Chris
tians . These , being weary from the journey , fell
asleep ; the Father alone watched in prayer . To
ward midnight , he hears fierce vo ices and confused
shouts , - partly from the victorious expedition ,which had on the same day taken the Village of St .
j ean ; partly from the poor captives , who were singing , according to their custom , songs of war . T he
Father awakens his companions , who hastily fiee
away into the most secret pl aces of the woods ,some here , some there , withdrawing from the road ,
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
arriuan do alla n ation e del Tabacco , riferirono , che ilPadre gli hau eua fegu itati qualche tempo , ma che
fen ten dofi mancar le forze difïe . N on importa , che
qu i io muoia , qu e fta vita è poca cofa , la felicità del
Paradifo è il vero bene , che non mi pub e fi'
er tolto
da gl ’ H irochefi . All ’ Alba il Padre rip iglia la ftradaper S anta Maria , ma dopo alquanto di viaggio in contra vn fium e , che gl
’
im pedifce il pati o . Cosi ci ha
riferito vn ’ Hurone A poftata , che aggiunge d’ hauer
gli fatto pafiar il fium e nella fua canoa , e ritenne
per fcaricarl o (à quel , che di lïe) il fuo cappello , i
fuoi fcritti , con vn a coperta , che feru e in quei paefi
il di , di mantello , e la notte di letto . Quel , che
doppo gli auuen n e non 10 fappiam o , fe fù vccifo da
nemici , fe fi fm arri ne ’
bofchi , fe mori di freddo , o
di fame , fe tradito da chi ce ne diede 1’
vl tim a n uoua ,
e ne portaua le fpogl ie , certo è , che viaggiar in quei
paefi , è viaggiare in per icu l is fl um inû, per icu l is l a tronum
& c . per icn l is in f a lj i s f ra tr iôus , e qu e fto è il più proba
bile in quefi o caio , per non dir certo; nè difficile àcredere , d
’ vn A poftata , che s’ era poco prima van
tato , che vcciderebbe vn o di noi . Il Padre Natale
era della Prou in cia di T ol ofa . Mori all ’ età di 36.
anni , 19 . di R eligione , e 6. di dimora in quei paefi ,
per i quali banena hanuta vua forte vocation e , ma non
già fenza con traûi . D oppo li 4 . e 5. anni di ftudio
di quelle lingue appena poteua farfi intendere , ancor
che non m an cafie nè d ’ ingegno , nè di memoria , chehaueua fatto com parir in Francia , done hauea inie
gnata con gran fodisfattion e la R ethorica . Che morti
B R E S SA N I’
S RE LA TION , 1653
which the enemy held . These fugitives , arriving
from the Tobacco nation , reported that the Fatherhad followed them for a time , but that , feeling his
strength fail,he said : ! No matter if I die here ;
this life is a small thing ; the felicity of Paradise is
the true good , which cannot be taken from me by
the H iroquois . A t D awn , the Father resumes theway to S ainte Marie ; but , after some journeying , he
encounters a river , which hinders his passage . This
report was given us by an Apostate Huron , whoadded that he enabled him to cross the river in his
canoe , and retained , for landing him (as he said), hishat and his writings , together with a blanket , which
serves in those countries for a mantle by day and abed by night . What befell him afterward , we do not
know ,— whether he were killed by the enemies ,
whether he went astray in the woods , whether he
died of cold or hunger , or were betrayed by the man
who gave us the last news of him and was wearing
his spoils . 2 It is certain that to travel in those coun
tries is to travel in per ieu l isflum inum , per ien l is la tronum ,
etc . ; per icu l is in j‘
a l s is f ra tr ibus; and in this case this
is the most probable , not to say certain ; nor is itdiffi cult to believe of an Apostate who had boasted
,
a little before , that he would kill on e of us . FatherNoël was of the Province of Toulouse . He died at
the age of 36 years , 19 in R eligion , and 6 of residence
in those countries , for which he had had a strong vocat ion ,— but not indeed , without struggles . After 4or 5 years of study of those languages , he could
hardly make himself understood , although he was
not deficien t in either talent or memory ,— as he had
shown in France , where he had taught R hetoric withgreat satisfaction . What m ortification [ 12 1 i . e . , 12 3 ]
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
fication e [ 12 1 i . e . ,12 3 ] ad vn
’
hu om o , che brugia di
z elo , vederfi nell’
im pofiibil ità d’ operare per difetto
di lingua ? S econdo , banena naturalmente vn a grand’
a u erfion e al viu ere , e cofium i de Barbari tra ’
l
fumo, ô tra le neni à giacer à terra tra cani , e nello
ftrepito quafi continuo de grandi , e de piccoli , fenza
poterfi ritirare in luogo alcuno , che non foli e publico ,
fenz ’ altra luce di notte , che quella d’ vn fuoco pieno
di fumo ; oltr’ i pericoli più che quotid1am di cafcar
nelle mani d ’ vn nimico , che non hà per voi altro ,
che fuochi , e crudeltà inaudite . Terzo . Parenà,
che D io per aggrau argl i la Croce lo priuaii e delle
gratio ienfibil i , abbandonandolo al difgu fto , alla
triftez z a Non è qu ePca vn a gran pr0ua , m afilm e fe
dura li cinque , e li fei anni intieri? Hor tal fù quella
di qu efio fern o di D io , col quale pero il demonio non
guadagno mai niente . Gli fuggeriua ogni di , e più
volte il di . Che ritornando in Francia vi tronerebbe
il contento , che gli m an caua , e temporale , e fpiritu
ale,che banena in i altre volte fpefim en tato . Che vi
tronerebbe impieghi proportion ati à fuoi talenti ,in cl in ation e , ne
’ quali feru irebbe Dio con perfetti0n e ,
e fan tità , come tanti altri , à lui forfe in molte cofe
inferiori &c . ma non folo non il rendena à que fte
fugge ition i , ma per attaccarfi più ferma , in u iol abil
mente alla S . Croce . H au eua fatto del contrario vn
voto in qu e fta forma . S ignor m io Giesù Chri/l o, che
p er dispo/i t ionepa rt icol are del la vos’tra pa terna prou idenz a ,
m’
hanete, a ncorche indegno, f a tto coaa‘in tore de
'
vofi r i
S an ti Apofl ol i in gues’l a vigna degl i H uron i ; m oj o da l
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ ES UI TE S [VOL. 40
deflder io di j egu ire l’
impul/o del vo/tro Spir ito S . nel la
prom otione de’
B a rba r i H uron i; Io N a ta l e Chaha nel fo
voto a l l a pre/m ea del S a n ti/ s . S acram ento del Voj tro
S a nti/ s . Corpo , e S angue , vero Tabernacol o di D io con
gl i huom in i, di perpetua s!tabil ità in que/ta Miÿîone degl i
H uron i , nel m odo, che i S uper ior i in terpreta ra nno, i qua l i
diÆor ra nno [ empre l iberam en te di m e . Vi j upp l ico
dunque di r iceuerm i per f ernoperpetuo di que/ta Miÿione,
f acendom i degno d’
vn si j ubl im e m in ifter io. ques’to d i 20 .
di Giugno 164 7 . g iorno del S a ntiÿim o S acram en to .
L’
vl tim a volta , che parti per la m ifiion e don e
mori , dicendo Addio al fuo Padre fpiritual e; que ftavolta si (diffe) ipero , che farô da donero à D io ,
ma
con vn ’ accento tale che l ’ altro la chiamo voce
d ’
vn a vittima , che s im m ol aua , aggiun fe ad vnterz o : Io non SÔ i difegn i di D io , ma vedo bene , che
fa vn S . Con fe fsô ad vn’ intimo fuo , che fi sëtiua
tutto mutato , e che e fsëdo fta to fin'
al lhora timi
diflim o , e fpon en dofi in quel viaggio ad eu idëtifiim i
pericoli, [ 12 2 i . e . ,
12 4] non temena nulla . Ma qu efta
difpofition e , gli aggiun fe , non vien da me . E pali ando
il di fte ii o ,che mori per la Miffion e de S . Mattias ,
non SO di li e) ad vn o di quei Padri , perche l’ obedi
enza mi richiami , -ma 0 n on potro, 0 otterro di ritor
nare al mio po ii o . B i[fo]gn a perfeuerare , e feru ir Dio
fino alla morte , la quale defideraua , e fperaua ancor
più dol orofa , che non la prono. Cosi fcriu eua l ’ anno
inanzi ad vn fuo fratello della n oftra Côpagn ia in
Francia . Paco, dice , e m a nca to, che V. R . non habbi
hauuto vn fra tel lo ma rt ire . Ma D io dom anda per quest o
B R E S S A N 1’
S R E LA TION, 1653
f ol l owing the impu lse of your H oly Spir it in the adva nce
m en t of the H uron B a rôa r ia ns , I , N oel Chaba nel , m ake a
vow— in the presence of the Most B lessed S acram en t ofYour Most H oly B ody a nd B l ood, tr ue Tabernacl e of God
with m en — of perpetua l stabil ity in this Miss ion of the
H urons , in such way as the S uper iors sha l l in terpret , whosha l l a lwaysfreely dispose of m e . I heseechyou , theref ore ,
to receive m e f or a perpetua l serva n t of this Mission ,
m aking m e wor thy of so subl im e a m in istry , this day ,
the 2 0th of j une , 164 7 , the day of the Mos t B l essed'
S a cram en t .
The last time when he started for the mission
where he died , on saying Adieu to his Spiritual Fa
ther,This time indeed (he said), I hope that it
will be in very truth D ieu ,— but with such an
accent that the other ca lled it the voice of a victim
going to be sacrificed , and added to a third person :I know not the designs of God , but I well see that
he is training a Holy Confessor . Father Noë l said to
an intimate friend that he felt himself quite changed ;and that ,— although he had been until that time
very timid ,— in exposing himself on that journey to
most 0bvious dangers , [ 12 2 i . e . , 124 ] he feared noth
ing . But this disposition , he added , does n ot
come from myself . And , passing by the Missionof St . Matthieu , on the very day when he died , I
know n ot (he said to on e of those Fathers) why
obedience calls me back ; but , whether or not I shall
obtain permission to return to my post , it is n ecessary to persevere , and serve God even to death
,
which he desired and hoped for , of even a more pain
ful sort than he found it . He thus wrote,the year
before , to a brother of his in our Society in FranceB ut l itt le was la cking , he says , tha t Your R everence
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
vna vir tù d ’
vn'
a l tra tempra , che l a m ia . I l P . Gabr iel
L a l lem ent , vna de i tre vl tim am en te vccifl , ha ueua m eco
m uta to vn m ef e pr im a . Io, com e p iù robufto f u i m a nda to
ad vua m ifli one più lon tana , e p iù f a ticoj a , m a non si
fer tile in pa lm e , com e quel la , del la gua l e l a m ia tepidez z a
m'
hù re/o indegno . S a rà qua ndo piacera à D ia , purche
io da l ca n to m io non ma nchi tra tan to difa r m artyrem
in vm bra , martyrium fine fangu in e . I l f uror
degl’
H irochefi , che qui rouina ogn i cof a , fa rà f orfl vn d i
il resta per i m er iti di ta nt i S a n ti , co i qua l i io hà la con
f ola tione di viner in g ra ndiÿim a pa ce , ne’
con t inu i per icol i
del la vita &c. V. R . e cotes‘ti P adr i del la P rouincia fi
r icordino di me a l l’
A l ta re , com e d’
vna vittim a des’tina ta
a l fuoco degl'
H irochej i , vt m ercar tot S anc‘torum pa tro
cin io vitîor iam in tam f orti cer tam ine . D io glie la diede
nel modo , e tempo , che meno fperaua .
B R E S SA N I’
S RE LA TION , 1653
had had a m ar tyr brother . B ut God requ ires f or this a
virtue of a nother temper tha n m ine . Fa ther Gabr iel
L a l lem en t , one of the three la tely kil led, had ex cha nged
with m e a m on th before . as being m ore robust , was
sen t to a m ore dista n t a nd m ore fa tigu ing m ission , bu t
one not so fruitf u l in victor ies a s tha t of which my
l ukewa rm ness has rendered m e unworthy . I t wil l be
when God sha l l please , provided tha t on my side I
m eanwhilefa il not , am ong so m any,to act the pa r t of a
m artyrem in umbra , et martyrium sine sanguine .
The j ury of the H iroquois , which ruins everything here ,
wil l perhaps one day do the rest , through the m er its of so
m a ny S a in ts ,— withwhom I have the consola tion of l ivingin very grea t peace , in continua l dangers to l ife , etc .
May Your R everence and those Fa thers of the P rovince
rem em ber m e a t the A l ta r , as a vict im destined to thefireof the H iroquois ,
— u t merea r tot S a nctorum pa trocin iovictor iam in tam for ti cer tam ine God gave it to him ,
in the way and at the time that he least expected .
CAPITOL O OTTA VO .
D E SOL A T ION E D E L PAE SE DE GL I H U R ON I , E T R A N SL A
T ION E DE L L A M IS S ION E H U R ON A A KE BE K .
A crudeltà dal Barbaro vincitore de n oftri Chri
ftian i nel l or proprio paefe getto vn tale ipa
u en to ne’ loro cuori , che molti , efuli vol on tarij
fe ne fuggirono nel più profondo de bofchi ; altri sù
i fcogl i fteril i del mar dolce , prefe rëdo i precipitij ,
e gli abifii al fuoco de gl ’ H irochefi ; altri hebbero
ricorfo ad vua n ation e , che chiam auam o neutra , per
! tare all’ hora in pace con ambedue ; altri alle mon
tagne di quella del Tabacco . I pochi , che re ftauan o ,
ci e fortorn o di re ftar fe co fenza slontanarci più;
gl ’ infedeli promettendoci di farfi tutti Chriftian i , i
Chriftian î d’
e fier coftan ti nella Fede fin o alla morte .Noi per accomodarci atutti ; alcuni andammo dietro à
i fuggitiu i sù li fcogl i del mar dolce , e ne [ 12 3 i . e . ,12 5]
bofchi da 300 . e più miglia per con fol ar l i , e col tiuare
in e ffi la Fede ancor n afcen te; altri alle montagne delTabacco ; Il refi o c ’ impiegammo , vt disperf os congre
garem us in vnum , vn endoci à quei pochi , che con
infl an z a ci dom andauan o , con fperan z a di ridurne
degli altri H au eu an o quefti fce l ta per lor refugio vn’
H ola nel mar dolce , 2 4 o 2 5. miglia lon tano da noi .
Ci bifogn ô dunque fcafare per fegu itar l i , e metter
n oi fte iii il fuoco à quel poco , che nello fpatio di 9 . 0
B R E S S A N 1’S R E L A TION , 1653
CHA PTE R E IGHTH .
DE SOLAT ION OF T H E COU N T R Y OF T H E HU R ON S , A N D
R E MOVAL OF T H E HU R ON M IS S ION TO KE BE K .
H E cruelty of the Barbarian conqueror of ourChristians in their own country threw such a
terror into their hearts that many , voluntary
exiles, fled to the farthest depth of the woods ; others ,
upon the barren rocks of the fresh-water sea ,— pre
ferring precipices and abysses to the fire of the Hiro
quois . Others had recourse to a nation which we
called neutral ,” since it was then at peace with
both sides ; others , to the mountains of the Tobacco
nation . The few who remained exhorted us to staywith them , without retreating farther ,— the in fide l s
promising us all to become Christians , and the Christians to be constant in the Faith until death . That
wc might accommodate all , some of us went back to
the fugitives on the rocks of the fresh-water sea,and
into the [ 12 3 i . e . , 12 5] woods , 300 miles and more ,to console them , and to cultivate in them the still
incipient Faith ; others , to the mountains of the
Tobacco nation . The rest of us employed ourselves
u t dispersos congrega rem us in unum ,— uniting our
selves with those few , who urgently asked us , in the
hope of winning back others of the scattered people .
These had chosen for their refuge an Island in the
fresh -water sea , 2 4 or 2 5miles distant from us . We
were therefore obliged to go forth to follow them,
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
10 . anni hau euam o eretto , di cafa , e di Chiefa ,per
paura,che i nemici non profan aii ero quei luoghi di
Santità . Chiamammo queft’ I fola di S . Giofeppe , e
la refiden z a fiffa , che ci trasferimmo , la R efiden z a di
S . Maria , col nome della prima . Que fti bofchi intatti
forfi dal principio del mondo ci riceueron o , e ci
fom m in iitrorn o materia per fort ificarci con i n o itri
Barbari contro i communi nemici . Vt fine tim ore
in im icor um l ibera ti , feruüiim o al commun Signore.
H au euam o con noi alcuni fecol ari al numero di 40 .
che per diuotion e fenz a fperan z a d’ alcuna ricôpen fa
temporale feru iuan o qu eûa Miffion e , facendo ogni
forte di m e ftiero , ciafcun o fecondo la propria capa
cità , e tutti quello di fol dato , per difender quei pou eri
fuggitiui dall’
in curfion i di quei fpietati . Tutti con
i Barbari s ’ impiegarono talmente all ’ opra , che in vn a
R ate ci trouam m o regolarmente difefi con i n oftri
Chriftian i , i quali in brene in i con corfero da varieparti per potere con ficure z z a , e facilità riceuere 1
’ in
ftru ttion i n eceffarie per la con feruation e , augu
mento della lor fede . Ma non v ’
è in que fta vitabene alcuno fenza con trapefo di qualche male .
Qu efto gran con corfo , che era il fine di tutti i n oftri
trauagl i , porto feco in parte la rouina del pae fe , che
e ffen do nnono , e non hauen do potuto efier’ à baftan z a
col tiuato in si brene tempo, m afiim e da gente fame
lica , occupata in fiem e ad a l l oggiarfi ,e fortificarfi ,
non pote portar ’
a ii ai di che nutrire tanta gente
afi am ata , oppre li a da mille difagi , che haueuan o
cominciato l ’ anno inanzi . Onde non oftan te le
L E S R ELA TIONS D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
molte l im ofin e , che facemmo di 800 . facchi , la meta
di gran turche fco , la metadi ghiande , che il ftim auan o
in quel tempo cofa de l itiofa , e ce le l euauam o noi
fte f fi dalla bocca; non potemmo impedire , che non
ne m orifi ero l’
in uern o le centinaia , e centinaia di
fame . L ’
e ftate molti haueuan o p1u tofto differita lamorte , che prol ongata la vita , viuendo , 0 ne
’
bofchi
di poche radiche amare , e frutti fal uatichi ; o sù i
fcogl i di qualche pe fcio l in o , che come alla sfuggita
pe fcauan o per timore de nemici . Ma [ 12 4 i . e . , 126]l
’
inuern o , che la terra era coperta di 6. o 7 . palmi di
neue , i laghi,e fium i agghiacciati non potendo
hauere alcun foccorfo , nè dalla terra , nè dall ’ acqua ;fi ridu fi ero ad vn ’
e ftrem a m iferia E ra cofa ipa
uen tofa il vedere in vece d ’
huom in i , fche l e tri mori
bondi , caminar più come ombre di morti , che come
corpi de ’ vini ; e n utrirfi di quel che la natura hà più
in horr0re : difi otterrare i cadau eri , (che noi fotterra
uamo con le n oitre mani , mancando fpe fio i parenti
de morti di forze per farlo per cibarfen e , e mangiare
i re iti delle volpi , e de cani . Qu id non m orta l ia pet'
t’
o
r a cog z‘
s f acra f am es ? Gli H u ron i prima d’
hauer la
luce della Fede è vero,che m angiauan o i cadaueri
de ’ loro nemici,ma hebbero fem pre horrore di man
giarfi tra di loro niente meno , che gli E uropei . Main qu efta occafion e la n e ceflîtà ol trapafsô tutte le
leggi : qualche fratello hà m âgiato il morto fratelloqualche madre i m orti figl i , i figl i doppo morte
n on ricon ofceuan o ,nè rifpettauan o i cadaueri de
’
proprij padri . E ra vn fpettacol o afi ai frequente di
B R E S S A N I’
S R E LA TION . 1653'
consequence,notwithstanding the many alms that we
gave ,— 800 bags , half of turkish corn , half of acorns ,which at that time were esteemed a delicious article ,an d which we ourselves took from our own months ,we could n ot prevent hundreds and hundreds of them
from dying in the winter by hunger . In the sum
mer,many had rather postponed death than prolonged
life,by living either in the woods on a few bitter
roots and wild fruits ; or on the rocks , on some little
fish ,- which they caught , as it were , by stealth , for
fear of the enemies . But [ 12 4 i . e . ,126] in the win
ter ,— when the earth was covered with 6 or 7 palms
of snow,and the lakes and rivers were frozen , -un
able to obtain any succor from either the land or the
water , they were reduced to an extreme misery . I t
was a frightful thing to see,instead of men , dying
skeletons , walking more like shadows of the dead
than like bodies of the living ; and feeding them
s elves on that which nature has most in abomina
tion ,— exhuming the corpses (which we buried withour own hands , the relatives of the dead often lack
ing the strength to do so), in order to nourish themselves therewith
,and eat the leavings of foxes and
dogs . Qu id non m or ta l ia pectora cog is , sacra f am es It
is true that the H urons , before having the light of
the Faith , ate the dead bodies of their enemies ; but
they always had , no less than the E uropeans , a horror
of eating on e another , among their own people .
But on this occasion necessity exceeded all laws : a
certain brother ate his dead brother ; a mother , her
dead sons ; and the sons , after death ,did not recog
nize or respect the corpses of their own fathers . It
was a quite frequent spectacle to see two little
children still sucking the dry breasts of their dead
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
veder due bambini fucchiar ancor le fecche m âm e l l e
della morta madre , le madri fpirar con i figl i nel feno ,
0vederli morir alla mammella , che ofi eriuan o anche ài più grandi vn dopo l ’ altro per tirarne più tofto iliangue , che il latte , ma con refign ation e si grande , esi chrifiian a , che tirana dagli occhi lagrime non meno
di côpafiion e , che di deuotion e . H abbiam veduto
venire i moribondi da loro fte ifi à domandarci il Battefim o per pafiaporto dell
’ altra vita ; benedicendoci
in vn tëpo , che parena , che l’
im patiêz a gli dou e li e
tirare ogni m al edittion e dalla bocca . Molti ci prega
n ano , che li fotterrafiim o ancor fpiran ti , per paura
d ’ e li er diuorati da ’
fuoi , 0almeno l afciati nudi , cofa ,
che ftim an o più obbr0briofa in morte , che in vita .
Le iftruttion i , le prediche , l’
am m in iftration i de
Sacramenti , mai fono R ate più frequenti , nè riceuute
con più deuotion e non folo le feite , ma i giorni anche
di l auoro , qu efte con le vifite degli ammalati , e fepol
tura de morti erano le occupation i quotidiane de n oftri
Padri . S’
aggiügeua à qu e fti mali il timore de
nemici , che ci faceua vegl iar le notti intiere , per 116
e fi er come l ’ anno inanzi prefi all’
im prou ifo . Ma
egli fapen do le fortificationî fatte , e la vigilanz a ,ordine , che fi guardaua nell
’
H ola , volt0 le armial troue , come s
’
e vifto . Molti , che aiutati dalle
n ofi re l im ofin e fcam porn o il flage l l o della fame ,
furono afia l iti da vn mal con tagiofo ,che in pochi di
fece grä ftrage ,m aifim e ne ’ putti . Non vi reftaua
più che la guerra per rou in arl i afi atto , e que fta n on
m an cô, e cosi furono nell
’
ifte ii o tëpo [ 12 5 i . e . , 12 7]
BRE S SAN I ’
S RE LA TION, 1653
mother,the mothers dying with their children in
their laps ; or to see them die at the breast , which
was ofiered even to the largest , on e after the other ,to draw thence blood rather than milk , - but with so
great and so Christian resignation that it drew from
the eyes tears , no less of compassion than of devo
tion . We have seen the dying come of their own
accord to ask from us Baptism , as a passport to theother life ,— blessing us at a time when it seemed that
impatience should have drawn every malediction fromtheir lips . Many begged us to bury them while still
breathing , for fear of being devoured by their peo
ple , or at least left naked , a thing which they esteem
more shameful in death than in life . Instructions ,sermons , administrations of the Sacraments , were
never more frequent ; nor had they received withmore devotion not only the feasts , but also the work
ing days ; these , with visits to the sick and the burialof the dead , were the daily occupations of our Fa
thers . To these evils was added the fear of the
enemies , which caused us to watch whole nights , in
order n ot to be taken unawares , as in the year before .
B ut they , knowing the fortifications that were made ,and the vigilance and order which were observed onthe Island , turned their arms elsewhere , as was seen .
Many who , aided by our alms , escaped the scourgeof hunger , were attacked by a contagious disease ,which in a few days made great slaughter , especially
among the children . There remained nothing but
war to ruin them altogether , and this failed n ot ; and
thus they were at the same time [ 12 5 i . e . ,12 7] smit
ten with all three scourges . For , as soon as the ice
began to melt and the earth to become bare , our
dying people went ou t from the Island , in which they
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
percoiii da tutti tre i flage l l i; im peroche fubito , chi i
ghiacci com in ciorn o à l ique farfi , e la terra à fcoprirfi , i
n oftri m oribôdi vfciron o dall ’ H ola , nella quale erano
a ii ediati dalla fame , per cercaru i rimedio nell ’ acqua
cô qualche forte di pe l ca . Ma doue pen fauan o di
ritrouar la vita , vi riceu ern o , 0 la fchiau itudin e , 0 la
morte , e per n ô morir di fame , molti morirono di
fuoco , prefi da nemici , che gl’
inue ftiuan o da per
tutto , m afiim e di notte fenz ’ alcuna refiften z a , e li ëdo i
n oitri H u ron i diuifi in varie truppe per n eceffità , e
carichi di donne , e fanciulli , che non feru iuan o fe
non per augum en tar lo ipauen to , e la con fufion e .
Venne di più muona di due truppe nemiche , che veninano , vn a per dar il guaito a i câpi , l
’ altra alla gëte .
Due de più antichi Capitani vën ero à trouaroi in
fegre to , e tennero al Superiore con alcuni altri Padri ,
que fto difcorfo . Fra tel l o , i tuoi occhi t’
ingâna no,
m en tre ci r igua rdi . Tn penfi veder’
huom in i vin i , e noi
non flam o a l tro, che spettr i , a n im e de m or ti . Que/t‘a
Terra , che ca lchi non èferm a , s’
apr irà qua n to pr im a per
ingoia rci , e m etterci tra m or t i, tra qua l i pere) g iù ci con
t iam o. Quefta notte in vn conf egl io f egreto s’
r if oluto
a”abba ndona r la pr im a , che s
’
apra . Gl i vn i /i r itirano
ne’
bof chi , _/tim âdofl p iù ficur i tra l e fiere , ch'
eÆo/ti
a l l’
H irochej‘
e; a l tr i j e ne va nno à 6. g iorna te ver/ o il
S etten tr . sù i f cog l i del m a r dolce in compagn ia degl i
A lgonchin i ; a l tr i a l la nuoua S uetia 500 . m igl ia dis’Ztîte;
a l tr i dicono publ icam en te , che vogl iono m ena r l e lor m og l i ,
figl i , loro _/tefi a l paef e de’
nem ici , done troua râno vua
g rd pa r te de lor pa re’t i prigion i , i qua l i gl i ef or ta no a l la
B R E S SA N 1’
S R E LA TION , 1653
had been besieged by hunger , in order to seek for
its relief,in the water there , certain kinds of fish .
But,where they thought to recover life , they received
there either slavery or death ; and , instead of dyingby hunger
,many died by fire . These were seized
by the enemies , who were surrounding them on all
sides,especially at night , without any resistance ,
our Hurons being divided into several bands , from
necessity ; and burdened with women and children ,
who served only to augment the terror and the con
fusion . Moreover , there came news of two hostile
bands that were on their way to make havoc , on e
with the fields , the other with the people . Two
of the eldest Captains came to find us , in secret ;and to the Superior , in company with certain
other Fathers , they made the following speech :B rother , thine eyes deceive thee when thou l ookest a t us;
Thon thinkest tha t thou seest l iving m en , a nd we a re
nothing bu t ghosts , and sou l s of the dead . This L a nd
which thou treadest is not sol id; it wil l open very soon to*
swa l low us , a nd to pu t us am ong the dead , am ong whom
we therefore a l ready reckon ourselves . This n ight , in a
secret council , it has been resolved to aba ndon it before it
opens . S om e retrea t to the woods , accoun ting them selves
m ore secure am ong the wild bea sts tha n when exposed to
the H iroquois; others a re going away , 6 days'
j our neytowa rd the N or th ,
upon the rocks of the fresh-wa ter sea ,
in compa ny with the A lgonqu ins; others to new Sweden ,
500 m il es dista n t . S t il l others open ly say tha t they
them selveswil l take their wives a nd chil dren to the coun try
of the enem ies , where they wil l find m any of their captivekinsm en ,
who ex hor t them tofl ight un less theywil l u tter lyper ish . A nd wha t wil t thou do a l one , forsaken by a l l , in
this Isl and H ast thou com e here f or the cu l tiva tion of
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
fuga , j e nô vogl io afi‘
a tto per ire . E tu che f a ra i f olo,
a bbâdona to da tut ti in que/l’
If ol a ? S ei tu qui venuto per
la cu l tura del la terra , o del l’
a n im e ? Vuoi tu predica rl a fede à quefl i querci , que/ti pin i ? que/ti l aghi , e
ques‘ti fium i ha n f orfl orecchie per af col ta r t i , o in tel letto
per in tender ti ? D oue a ndera i ? chif egu ira i ? puoi tu f orfiaccompagnar vn popolo , chefl difipa in tat i paefl l a mag
g ior pa r te di quefl i f ugg itiu i trouerà la m or te,doue crede
troua r la vita , m a quando tu ha uefl cen to corpiper diu ider t iin cen to l uoghi , tu non lo potrej ti f a re f enz
’
efl ergl igra ue ,
oneroj o , e ben presto in horrore . L a f am e g l i accom
p agna rà da per tutto,e non fi ej en ta ranno da l flagel lo
del la guer ra . Che r im edio? habbi cuore , te lo m oj tra
rem o . Gua rda ver/ o Kebek , e lo vedra i . A rditam ê‘
te
in traprendilo, e lo f a ra i f el icem en te . Tu deui f a l uar i
re_/t
‘i di que/to rou ina to paef e . P igl iaci nel l e m an i tu che
d'ici , che ci par t i nel cuore . N ha i vifl i p iù di 10 . m ila
m or ti à tuoi piedi , j e aÆetti âcor vn poco, nô ve ne refta
rà nej'
uno, inua no t’
afl iggera i [ 126 i .e . , 12 8] di non
ha uer f a l ua to a lm eno quel , che poteui . N on bi/‘
ogna più
conj u l ta re , bi/‘
ogna pa rt ire , e traäor ta r que/ie rel iqu ie
del la Chiej a H urona a l l’
ombra del for te di Kebek ,
quanto pr ima , già , che ogu’
vn fugge per non aspettar
a rr ino del nem ico. [ n i l a noj tra Fede non j olo non
per icol a rà , anz i s'
a uu iua rù, vedendo gl i ef empi deiA lgonchin i, e de Francefi , e l e loro ca r ità ci a iuta ranno,
quando non pote[ ero , non vol e[ ero, e ci bi/ognofl’
e iui
mor ire , ha urem o a lm eno quest a conf ol a tione di non m or ire
abba ndona ti ne’
bof chi, ma vicin i à chi ci r incor i in que!
duro pafi‘
aggio fenz a pregiuditio del la nofl ra Fede, che
p iùfi z‘
m iamo, che la vita .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
Il n egotio era troppo importante per n on pen farci ,e ne vn di
, nè due , n e dieci baftauan o per conclu
derlo . L afciar’ vn paefe tanto defiderato , tanto
cercato , done ogn’
vn o banena il fuo cuore ; Paefe , che
riguardauam o , come la chiane di tante m ifii on i à mille
popoli fcon ofciu ti , e doue attualmente haueuam o,
oltre 6. m iflion i della lingua H uron a, 5. per diuerfe
n ation i d ’ Algonchini non era piccol n egotio . Dall ’
altro canto le raggion i de' Barbari ci pareuan o fenz a
replica , e conu in cen ti . Che fare ? R addoppiamo
le n oftr e diuotion i con 1’
oration e delle 40 . hore .
Coll ’ oration e cô iu l tiam o il Cielo , e con frequenti
con fu l te conferiamo tra noi le 15. e 2 0 . volte afi ai à.
lungo; fem pre ci pare , che D io habbi parlato per l a
bocca di quei Capitani . D iceuan o la verità : il pae fe
degli H uron i n ô era più altro , che vn luogo d ’
hor
rore , e di carn ificin a , e parena inhabitabil e ad altri ,
che alle furie dell ’ Inferno . D ouun q; riguardauam o
per ritirarci , e ceder alle m iferie del tempo , v’
in cô
trauam o ,e fame , e guerra; e per altro fperauam o
poterne fa l uar molti vicino alle habitation i Fran cefi
con maggior facilità d ’
in itru ir l i nella Fede , nellaquale erano ancor n uou i . B ifogn ô dunque ren derfi;
tutti d’ vn commun con fen fo contro la propria inoli
n ation e , con fefiandofi conu in ti dalle raggion i de
Barbari . E perche il nemico non dormina , bifogn ô
afirettarn e l ’ e fe cu tion e al poffibil e , prima , che ci
ten de ii e infidie per il camino . Abbandonamm o dunque , ma non fenza lagrime , quel caro paefe , che
in añiato felicemente co i fudori , e col iangue de’
BRE S SAN I ’
S’
RE LA TION . 1653
This transaction was too important not to require
thought,and neither on e day n or two , n or ten , were
suffi cient to settle it . To leave a country so much
desired,so much sought after , where each on e had
his heart,— a Country which we regarded as the key
to so many missions to a thousand unknown peoples ;and where we actually had , besides 6 missions in the
Huron language , 5 for various nations of Algonquins
,— was not a small affair . On the other side ,
the reasons of the Barbarians appeared to us unan
swerabl e and convincing . What was to be done ?We redouble our devotions , together with the 40
hours ’ prayer . With prayer we consult Heaven ;and with frequent deliberations we confer among our
selves , 15 or 20 times , at considerable length . It
ever appears to us that God has spoken by the mouth
of those Captains . They were telling the truth ; the
country of the Hurons was no longer aught else than
a place of horror and of slaughter , and appeared
uninhabitable to others than the furies of Hell .Whithersoever we looked , that we might retire , and
yield to the miseries of the time , we encountered
both hunger and war ; and , besides , we hoped to be
able to save many of them when near the French
settlements , with greater facilities for instructing
them in the Faith , in which they were still new . It
was therefore necessary to yield ,— all with a common
consent , though against their own inclination,
acknowledging themselves convinced by the Bar
barian s’ reasons . And because the enemy was not
asleep , it was necessary to hasten the execution of
the plan to the utmost , before he laid snares for us
by the way . We abandoned , therefore , bu t not
without tears , that dear country , which ,blessedly
L E S RE L A TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
n oftri fratelli , ci prom etteua vu a copiofa meli e , e ci
dan a a tutti fperan z a d’ imitarli , e in vita , e in morte .
L ’
vn ica n oftra con fol ation e fù di menar con noi circa
300 . perfon e d’
vu a n ation e altre volte popol atif fim a ,
rou in ata quali affatto nel tempo , che era più fedele à
Dio , il quale ne hau eua tirati i fuoi eletti , e ipopo
lando quella Terra , banena popolato il [ 12 7 i . e . ,12 9]
Cielo , arricchito delle n oitre perdite . Qu e fti infelici
reft i de diu in i flage l l i nella perdita de beni , della
Patria , e de’ parenti n ô han peria la Fede
,la quale
qu eft’
vl tim o anno era [tata com m un icata col S . Bat
tefim o à più di tremila perfon e , che hora ne po li e
dono,come fperiam o , il frutto in Paradifo . Partimmo
dagli H uron i al principio di Maggio , e doppo 900 .
miglia di camino , varij difagi , e pericoli , e fpef fi
n au fragi j arriuäm o fin a lm en te tutti a Kebek con per
fetta fan ità li 2 8 . di Luglio 1650 . done poco doppo circa
altri 300 . ci hano fegu itati . Qu i äcorche l’
Il l u ftrifs .
Gouern atore ,qualche particolare , i due Mon afteri j
d i Monache fi fian o caricati fopra le loro forze , d’ al
cune poche famiglie,nondimeno il forte del pe fo è
caduto l opra le n oftre fpal l e , che ci fiam o di buon
cuore caricati dello fpiritua l e , e temporale del refio ,
che D io n on l afcia fin ’ hora morir di fame . Ma è
bifognato per qu efi o fcaricar la m iffion e d’ alcuni
operarij , m aifim e n on e ffen do in quef’ta pau cità di
gente , come prima n ece fi ari j . Che fe il Lettore midom anda ii e ,
che diuerrà qu e iia m iffion e ; fe fi rimet
tera vn giorno; fe v ’
e fperan z a di ritorno per gli
H uron i , e per i n oftri . Io gli rifpon dere i , che l udi
B R E S S A N I’
S R E LA TION ,1653
watered with the sweat and the blood of our breth
ren,was promising us an abundant harvest , and was
giving all of us the hope of imitating them , both in
life and in death . Our only consolation was to take
with us about 300 persons of a nation formerly most
populous,but now almost utterly ruined , at the time
when it was most faithful to God ,— who had drawn
from it his elect , and by depopulating that Land ,had peopled [ 12 7 i . e . , 12 9] Heaven , which is enriched
by our losses . These unhappy remnants from the
divine scourges , did n ot , in the loss of their posses
sions , their native Country , and their kinsmen , lose
the Faith , — which in this last year had been bestowed
by Holy Baptism upon more than three thousand
persons ; these now enjoy , as we hope , the fruit ofit in Paradise . We departed from the Hurons at the
beginning of May ; and , after 900 miles of march ,
amid various hardships and perils , and frequent ship
wrecks ,— we all finally arrived in perfect health,
on the 2 8th of j uly , 1650 , at Kebek ,— whither , soon
afterward , about 300 others followed us . Here,
although the Most Illustrious Governor , a certain
private citizen , and the two Convents of Nuns , burden ed themselves above their strength with some
few fam il ies f n everthe l ess the bulk of the load fell
upon our shoulders ; bu t with good courage we
charged ourselves with the Spiritual and temporal
interests of the remnant , whom God has not hitherto
allowed to die of hunger . But on this account it
has been necessary to relieve the mission of some
laborers ,— especially as they are n ot , in this paucityof people , indispensable as before . N ow if theR eader should ask me , What will become of this
mission ? ”— whether it will be restored some day ;
L E S R E L A T ION S D E S [ E S UI T E S [VOL . 40
cia D ei abyfi'
us m u l ta . Ma l e il furor de l ’ H irochefe fi
reprim e ii e , perche nO? Io SO, che vi fono gran diflim e
diffico l tà , m a quæ impofii bil ia f un t apud hom ines , po[bil ia f un t apud D eum , apud quem non eft impoj ibil e om ne
verbum . E per altro il mondo non finira, che l’
E n an
gelio non fia predicato da per tutto . Hor verfo l ’ Oc
cide n te degli H uron i fin o al mare della China fono
innumerabili n ation i , qu ibus nondum est a nnuncia tum
R egn um D ei , bifogn a dunque che vn giorno l’
E nan
gelio c ’
arriui , quando bene tutte queûe m ili l on i per
vn tempo fin iii ero ,D io sa il come . N on e/Z no/Zrum
noj'
e tempora , vel m om en ta , quæ pa ter pof uit in f ua
pote/ta te . Ma si bene di fupp l icarl o , che quanto prima
A duen ia t r egnù f uum , e che fia gl orificato da ogni
gente , e n ation e , fin che fia t vnum ou il e , vnus pa/tor ,
om nes l abio vn um la udem us viuen tem in fæcu la fæcu
l orum . R eitano perO ancora nel Canada circa 30 .
PP . per diuerfe m iflîon i , e ftabil i , e volanti ; a Tadu
fak ; verio gl’
Ingl efi ; à gli A tticam eghi &c . oltre il
Collegio di Kebek , e le R efidëz e di Syl l eri , de i tre
fium i , e di Mon trea l e , nominate al principio , l’
hi l to
ria delle quali fi è fcritta ogu’ anno in Fran ce fe . Il
tutto fi farebbe più fchiarito colla mappa , che fperauo
qu i aggiungere , ma non e li en do in ordine ; chi la
defiderarà , la potrà di qu i a poco hauer à parte conle figure de Barbari , e delle loro crudeltà .
L A V S D E O .
BRES SAN I ’
S R E LA TION, 1653
whether there is hope of a return for the Hurons and
for ours , I would answer him that j udicia D ei abys
sus m u l ta . But if the fury of the H iroquois should
moderate itself,why n ot ? I know that there are
very great difiicu l ties , but quæ imposs i‘
bil ia sun t apudhom ines , possibil ia sun t apud D eum , apud quem non est
impossibil e om ne verbum . And , furthermore , the worldwill n ot end until the Gospel has been preached
everywhere . N owWestward from the Hurons , even
to the sea of China , are innumerable nations , qu ibus
nondum est a nnuncia tum R egnum D ei, hence it is n eces
sary that the Gospel one day reach thither ; even
though all these missions should cease for a time ;God knows how . N on est nostrum nosse tempora , vel
m om en ta , quæpa ter posu it in sua potesta te ,— but , indeed ,to beseech him that A dven i
‘
a t regnum suum as soon as
possible ; and that he be gl orified by every people
and nation , until fia t unum ovil e , et unus pa stor , et
om nes labio unum la udem us viven tem in sæcu la sæcu l orum .
As it is , there still remain in Canada about 30 Fathersfor various missions , both stationary and itinerant ,at T adusak , toward the E nglish , among the Atticam egu es , etc — besides the College of Kebek and the
R esidences at Syl l eri , three rivers , and Montrea] ,mentioned at the beginning , the history of which
has been written every year in French . The whole
would have been made clearer with the map which
I was hoping to add here , but it is not ready . Those
who shall desire it can have it a little while later,in
separate form , with pictures of the Barbarians andtheir cruelties .
LA U S D E O .
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
Tauola de’
Capitol i.
pag .
P a r tepr im a Cap . 1 . S itua tione , inuen tione
del la N uoua Francia . pag .
Cap . 2 . D ef cr itt ione del pa ef e degl i H uron i .
Cap . 3 . D el f uolo , viuere , ves?ire de’
B a rba r i
del la n uoua Fr a ncia 7
Cap . 4 . P ol itica de B a rba r i Ca nadej i . 12 14 ]Cap . 5. R el igione de
’
m edefim z . 19 2 1]P a r te S econda D el la Conuerfione de Canadefi a l la
2 8 30]Cap . 1 . P r im a dificol tà del la Cohnerfione degl i
H uron i prej a da l Pa c/ e . 2 9 3 1]Cap . 2 . S econda dificol tù, i per icol i del viaggio .
Cap . 3 . Ter z a dificol tà , la l ingua . 54 56]Cap . 4 . A l tre difiicol tù del la Conuerfione de B a r
ba r i, pa r ticola rm en te degl i H uron i . 62 64]P a r te Terea Mor te d
’
a lcun i PP . del la Compa
gn ia di Giesù nel l e Miÿi on i del l a N uoua
72 [L e 74 ]Cap . 1 . Mor te del P . A nna de N oue , e del P . E nne
m ondoMafia . 72 74]Cap . 2 . D el P . If a ac Iogues . 77
Cap . 3 . R efi‘
o del la vita , e m or te del P . Iognes .
102 104]Cap . 4 . Mor te del P . A n ton io D an iel 105 107]
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S
Cap . 5. Mor te del P . Gio : di e P . Ga
br iel le L a l l em en t . 107
Cap . 6. Mor te del P . Ga rn ier . 1 14
Cap . 7 . Mor te del P . N a ta le Chabanel . 1 19
Cap . 8 . D ej ola tione del Pa ej e degl i H uron i , e
tra nsla tione del la Miflione H urona à Kebek .
12 2 [i . e
1653 ] B R E S S A N I’
S RE L A TIOIV, 1653
Chap . 5. D ea th of Fa ther j ea n de B rebeuf , a nd
Fa ther Gabr iel L a l lem en t . 107
6. D ea th of Fa ther Ga rn ier .
1 14
of N oël Chaba nel .
1 19
8 . D esola tion of the Coun try
rons , a nd rem ova l of the H uron
12 2 124]
LXXXIV
1652
SEBASTIEN ET GABRIEL CRAMO ISY,
SOURC E : We follow a copy of the original
(H . 101) in Lenox L ibrary , NewYork .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S ] ÉS UI TE S [VOL . 40
Table des Chapitres contenvs en ce Livre.
E L A TION de ce qui s’
e/t pa/Së en la Mil/Siondes P eres de l a Compagn ie de I E S V S a u
P ays de l a N ouuel l e Fra nce depuis ’
E tc’ de
l’
a nnée 1652 . iuf ques à l’
a nnée 1653 . page
CH . I . D’
vn va iÿ'
ea u pr is pa r l es A nglais , des
m em oires don t il efi pa r lé en l a l ettre preceden te .
I I . D e ce qu i s’
eft‘pa/3
‘ë à Mon tr ea l .
I I I . D e ce qu i s’
efi paj s‘e’a ux Trois R iu ieres .
IV . D e la pr i/ e de l a del iura nce du Pere Iof eph
P oncet .
V . D e l a Pa ix f a ite a uec l es Iroquois .
VI . D e la P a ix f a ite a uec vne N a t ion qui habite
du co_/te
'
du S ud a l’
e'
ga rd de Quebec .
VI I . L a P a uuretë l es R ichefl'
es du Pays
VI I I . L a por te f erm äe l’
E ua ng il e , j em bl e
s'
ouur ir pl us gra nde que zam a 2s .
CHAP . DE R N . R ecueil t iré de diner/ es L ettres appar tees de la N ouuel l e Fra nce .
Fin de la Table des Chapitres .
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
Table of Chapters contained in this Book.
E L A TION of wha t occurred in the Mission ofthe Fa thers of the S ociety of E S U S in the
Coun try of N ewFrance , f rom the S umm er ofthe yea r 1652 to the yea r 1653 . page
CHAP . I . Of a vessel taken by the E ng l ish, a nd ofthe m em oirs ref erred to in the preceding l etter .
I I . Of wha t occurred a t Mon trea l .
I I I . Of wha t occur red a t Thr ee R ivers .
IV . Of the captur e a nd del ivera nce of Fa ther
V . Of the Pea ce m ade with the Iroquois .
VI . Of the P eace m ade with a N a tion dwel l ingin a S ou ther ly direction f rom Quebec .
VI I . The Pover ty a nd the R iches of the Coun try .
VI I I . The door closed to the Gospel seems to openwider tha n ever .
CHAP . TH E LAST . E x tracts f rom va r ious L etters
brought f rom N ewFra nce .
E n d of the Table of Chapters .
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
Re lation de ce qvi s’
elt pal ié en la Mill iondes Peres de la Compagnie de IESVS , au
Pays de la Nouue l le France , depuisl’
Eté de l’
annéle] 1652 . iuf
ques à l’
année 1653 .
L E T T R E D U PE R E SU PE R IE U R D E L A M IS S ION , A U
R E U E R E N D PE R E PR OU IN C IA L .
ON R . PE RE ,
B itant dans le de li e in d’informer V . R . de
l’
e l iat de nos Mi ll ions en ce n ouu eau Monde ; mon
[2 ] e l prit s’e lt trouué partagé , entre la crainte l ’ef
peran ce . La perfidie des Iroquois , que nous anonse fprouu ée à nos d
’
e fpen s , me fait peur : les rai0ns
de bonté,que D ieu a fait éclater n ouu e l l em en t fur
ces Contrées , bann i li an t cette crainte , pour loger en
l a place vue douce e fperan ce . S i n os E nnemis font
de l oyau x , D ieu e l t tres—fide l l e : s ’ ils font tres
m e chan s , tres-cruels , D ieu e lt tre fbon , tres
doux : s ’ ils on t la pen fée de nous perdre , D ieu à la
volonté de nous fauuer . N ous adorons l a conduitte ,
fur nous fur nos E gl ifes . Ie puis dire aneo
verité,que depuis dix hu it ans , que ie confidere les
re li 0rts de fa prou iden ce fur nos petits trauaux , i’
ay
remarqué qu ’ il n ’a iam ais éloigné fa vene, ny l es
regards,de ceux qui prodiguent leurs vies pour l on
honneur . [3 ] Il nous a re l eue z en nous abbai li an s ;
Re lation of what occurred in the Missionof the Fathers of the Society of JESUS ,in the Country of NewFrance , from
the Summer of the year 1652
to the year 1653 .
L E T T E R FROM T H E FATHE R SU PE R IOR OF T H E M ISS IONTO T H E R E VE R E N D FATHE R PR OVIN C IAL .
Y RE VE RE ND FA THE R ,
P ax Chr ist i .
When I purposed informing Your R everence of the state of our Missions in this new World
,
my [2 ] heart was divided between fear and hope .
The perfidy of the Iroquois , which we have e x perien ced to our cost , causes me alarm ; and the rays of
goodness which God has recently caused to shed their
radiance upon these Countries , banish that fear , toput a sweet hope in its place . I f our E nemies are
treacherous , God is very faithful ; if they are verywicked and cruel , God is very good and gentle ; if it
is their intention to destroy us , it is God’ s will to
save us . We adore his guidance , of both us and our
Churches . I can say with truth that , in the eighteen
years during which I have observed the workings ofhis providence over our little labors , I have remarkedthat he has never turned away his eyes or hidden his
face from those who freely give their lives in honor
of him . [3] He has exalted us in abasing us ; has
made us find life in death ; and , at the moment when
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
il nous a fait trouue r la vie dedans la mort : au
point que la nuit d’
vu profond de l e fpoir , fe vou l oit
emparer de nos cœurs , il a fait n aiûre vn iour , qui
donnera de l ’
etonn em en t iniques dedans la France .
Les cho l es fon t encor l i recentes , que nous pouuon s
dire , que nous craignons fans craindre , que nous
e fperon s contre toute e fperan ce . N ous en uoyon s au
Pere Paul le Ieun e Procureur de n os Mi llions , lesm emoires de nos bonnes , de n os m auuail es auan
t ures , pour les pre l en ter a Vo l tre R eueren ce . E lle
v erra que nous au0ns be foin plus que iam ais de l es
p rieres , des l ecours de tous ceux qui prennent partIa nos biens , à nos maux : qui craignent dans nosc raintes , qui efperen t dedans [4 ] n os efperan ces .
V o ltre R eueren ce fe fouuien n e , s’ il luy pl ai lt a l
’au
tel de ces panures peuples de toutes nos Mi ll ions ,en particulier de ce l uy qui luy e l t de cœur par
deuoir .
Mon R euerend Pere ,A Quebec ce 29. Tres-humble tres -obeïf
d’
Oâ obre 1653 . fau t feruiteu r , en No l tre
Seigneur .
FR AN CO IS L E ME R CIE R .
RELA TION OF 1652—53
the darkness of a deep despair was about to take
possession of our hearts , he caused a light to dawn
that will arouse wonder even in France . These
events are still SO recent that we can say that we fear
without fearing , and that we hope against all hope .
We send to Father Paul le j eune , P rocurator of ourMissions , the account of both our good and our ill
fortunes , in order that he may present it to YourR everence . You will see that we are in greater need
than ever of your prayers , and of the assistance ofall those who take an interest in our weal and woe
,
who fear in our fears and hope in [4] our hopes .
Your R everence will please to remember at the altarthese poor people and all our Missions
,and
,in par
ticu l ar , him who is , cordially and devotedly ,My R everend Father ,
Quebec , this 29t/z Your very humble and veryof October , 1653 . obedient servant in Our
Lord ,FR AN CO IS L E ME R C IE R .
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
[5] CHAPITRE PREMIE R .
D’
VN VA IS SE AU PR IS PA R L E S A N GLO IS , D E S MÉMO IR E SDON T IL E ST PAR LE E N L A L E TT R E
PR E CE DE N T E .
E P ere a qui on auoit confié ces memoires,ayant
e lté pris par les A ngl ois , le dix feptie fm e du
mois de D ecembre dernier pa li é : les fol dats ,qui s
’
e ltoien t rendus m ai l tre s du vai li eau qui le por
toit,le fou il l eren t , le pil l eren t anili bien que les
autres ; ils luy rau iren t l a petite Chapelle,en vn
m ot , ils luy ofteren t iu l ques a l on B reu iaire , n’
épar
gn an s n’y Gal ice , nyMell el , ny orn em en s facerdotaux ,
non pas me lme vn e méchante couu erture , dont il l e
feru0it les nuits , [6] all és froides , a ll és longues .
Ils ouuriren t tous les paquets , dep l ieren t tous les
papiers, efperan s trouuer quelques pieces dargent
mais l e voyan s fru l trés de leurs efperan ces , ils en
dechireren t vn e partie , ietteren t l’autre en la mer ,
ou bien fur le tillac du n au ire , où tout le monde
m archoit pefle-m efle , les vainqueurs les vaincus ,
les humiliés , les In fol en s . Le panure Pere ramali adoucement ce qu ’ il pût d e lettres , de papiers , de
memoires . Les vn s e ltoien t en lambeaux , les
autres e l toien t fales , comme il on les eut retirés de
la bouë . Les François les mieux ve l tus , furent
depou il l és tous nuds , pour eitre couuers de vieux
haillons : ils pa li oien t les nuits fous le tillac , fans
autre m atte l as que les ordures , les fal etés cau fées
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
par vn ramas de [7] S oldats , des Matte l ots , de
Pa li agers : detrem pées dans les eaux de la mer , qui
en troien t par les l abores , qui l e cou l oien t entre les
deux ponts , pour feru ir de lits , de couuertures , a
ces panures vaincus . E nfin le n au ire fut conduit aP l eym outh en Angleterre .
C ’e l t icy , où nos François ren con tran s quelques
vai li eaux, quelques Capitaines leurs compatriotes ,
tombés dans le me lme malheur , furent failis d’
vn e
n ouu e l l e douleur . A peine leur n au ire fut-il entré
dedans le port , qu i l l e vit inneity de tous col tés , debatteaux , de gondoles remplis de marchands , qui
m on teren t audi -toit fur le tillac , pour acheter des
fol dats , le pillage le vol qu ’ ils ven oien t de com
mettre . Le P ere vit vendre a l ’
E n can fon B reu iaire ,ce l uy qui l
’
ache ta , ne [8] demanda point S’
il e ltoit a
l’
vfage de R ome , ou de quelque autre D ioce fe ,la
pieté de ces bonnes gens , e l t d’
auoir de largent ,d ’ en tirer des chofes fain cftes , anil i bien que des pro
phanes . N os François voyoien t mettre a l’
en chere
leurs petis meubles , la plus part des pa liage rs
perdirent en vn lour,ce qu ’ ils au0yen t gagné en plu
fieurs années en la N ouue l l e France . Quelques-vn s
d ’entre eux dil oien t que la perte de ce n au ire,
pouuoit monter à trois cent mille liures . l e ne fçayl i cela e l
‘
t veritable , mais l e fçay bien , qu’on voyoit
dans vn e m iferabl e rencontre , beaucoup de ioye ,beaucoup de trilte li e : les vu s bai li oien t la te l l e ,
les autres la l euoien t aneo all és de fa ite , l e re iouïf
fans, S icu t ex u l ta n t vic
‘i ares cap td prædd , qua ndo diu idun t
j pol ia . [9] Comme des victorieux , lors qu’ils parta
gent leur proye , leur butin .
Il ny a lieu au monde , excepté l’
E n fer , Où il ne l e
R ELA TION OF 1652—53
of [7] Soldiers , S ailors , and Passengers , and was
steeped in the sea -water which came in through the
port-holes,and ran along between the two decks , to
serve as beds and blankets to those poor vanquished
souls . At last the ship was brought to P l eym ou th
in E ngland .
Here our Frenchmen , meeting with some vessels
and Capta ins from their own country , subj ect to the
same misfortune , were seized with a fresh grief .
Scarcely had their ship entered the harbor, when it
was surrounded on all sides by boats and gondolas
filled with merchants , who immediately came up on
deck to purchase from the soldiers the fruits of the
pillage and theft just committed by them . The
Father saw his Breviary sold at Auction , the purchaser not [8] asking whether it was for the use of
R ome or of some other D iocese . The piety of those
worthy people consists in having money , and in ob
taining it from things sacred , as well as from things
profane . Our Frenchmen saw their little belongings
put up at auction , and the greater part of the pas
sengers lost in on e day what they spent several years
in gaining in N ew France . S ome of them said that
the loss of this ship might reach as high as three
hundred thousand livres . I do n ot know whether
that is true ; bu t I do know very well that there was
seen , in pitiful conjunction , much joy and great
sadness ,— some hanging their heads , and others rais
ing theirs vaingloriously and rejoicing, S icut ex u l ta n t
victores capta p rædd , qua ndo dividun t spol ia! like
victors when they divide their plunder and booty .
”
There is no place in the universe,except Hell
,
where there are n ot found some good people, or some
persons of a good disposition . Som e E nglishmen
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
trenne , des gens de bien , ou des perfon n es de bon
naturel . Quelques A ngl ois , s’
approchan s du P ere ,luy firent vn e petite aumoine . Il faut con fe li er que
c’e lt vn c cho l e bien rude , bien facheu l e , de faire ,comme on dit , naufrage au port . Ce panure Pere ,tous les pa li agers , les matelots du melme equipage ,ayans fou ffert les fatigues de la mer , dans vn long
voyage,n
’
e ftan s pas loing de leur patrie , gou l tan s
par auan ce le repos,la douceur , qu
’ils atten doyen t
de la veu ë , de la communication de leurs parens
de leurs amis : l e virent m iferabl em en t pris enle
n és , par des [ 10] gens , qui ne portent pas le nom
d ’ennemis,mai s qu i en font toutes les aétion s . D ieu
l oit beny de tout,pour con cl ufion les A ngl ois ayans
retenu quelques iours le Pere a Pl eym outh , le firët
pali er au Havre de Grace , à la fol l icitation de quelques Capitaines François , dont les va i li eaux auoyen t
e l té pris , conduits dans ce me lme port . Voila
comme nous au0ns receu les fragm en s des memoires ,qu ’on nous enuoyoit .
approached the Father and bestowed on him a small
gift of charity . It must be admitted , it is a very
harsh and trying experience to suffer shipwreck in
port , as the saying is . This poor Father and all the
passengers and sailors of the same Ship , after they
had endured the fatigues of the sea during a long
voyage,and when they were not far from their native
land ,— and tasting , in anticipation , the rest and
delight which they expected from seeing and con
versing with their relatives and friends,— saw them
selves miserably captured and carried off by [ 10]those who did n ot bear the name
,although they
displayed all the conduct , of enemies . Let God beblessed for all things . To conclude , after the E nglish had kept the Father for some days at P leymouth , they sent him over to Havre de Grace , at the
solicitation of some French Captains whose vesselshad been captured and brought into this same port .I t is thus that we received the fragments of them emoirs that were sent to us .
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
CHA PITR E 11.
D E CE QU I S’
E ST PASSE A MON T R E AL .
l ecours extraordinaire , qu’on a enuoyé en cette
habitation , au dernier embarquement ; [ I I ] a
donné de la ioye , non feulement aux François ,qui y font leur demeure : mais encor à tout le pais .Quelques perfon n es de merite , de vertu , qui
aym en t mieux eitre con n u ës de D ieu , que des
hommes : ayans donné dequoy l eu er vn e bonne
e fcouade d’
ouuriers , fem bl abl es a ceux qui rebatif
foien t Iadis le Temple de Ierufal em , m an ian s l a
truelle d’
vn e main , l ’épée de l ’autre : on a fait
pal ier a Montreal , plus d’
vn e centaine de branes
A rt ifan s ; tous fçauan s dans les métiers qu’
ils pro
fe li en t , tous gens de cœur pour la guerre . D ieu
ben i li e au centuple , ceux qui on t com m an cé cet
ouurage , leur donne la gloire d ’
vn e fain te perfe
u eran ce , pour la mettre à chef .Les Peres de n o ltre Compagnie , [ 12 ] qui font en
cette habitation , voyan s que les Iroquois la mugne
toien t in ce li am m en t , faifan s des couries dedans l’
Ifle
dre lian s à toute heure des em bu fcades : ten an s nos
François fi étroitement a ll i egés , qu’on n
’
o l oit tant
l oit peu s’
ecarte r , fans vn danger eu iden t de perdre
la vie ; comme il arriua a vn panure m iferabl e , qui
pour n’
auoir pas fu iuy les ordres , qu’
on luy auoit
donnés : tomba m a lheureu fem en t dans les armes de
ces cha li eurs d’hommes . N os P eres dy-ie voyan s
RELA TION OF 1652 53
CHAPTE R I l .
OF WHAT OCCU R R E D A T MON T R E AL .
H E extraordinary assistance that was sent to
this settlement by the last shipment [ 1 I ] gave
joy n ot only to the French who live there , but
also to the whole country . Certain persons of merit
and virtue , who choose to be known of God rather
than of men , having given the means to raise a suit
able company of workmen ,— like those who , in days
of Yore , rebuilt the Temple of j erusalem , wielding
the trowel with on e hand and the sword with the
other ,— there were sent over to Montreal more than
a hundred worthy Artisans , all well versed in thetrades that they professed , and all men of courage
for war . May God bless a hundredfold those who
began this work , and give them the glory of a holy
perseverance in pushing it to completion .
The Fathers of our Society [ 12 ] who are at this
settlement observed that the Iroquois were in ce s
san t l y striving to obtain it , making sallies into the
Island , continually laying ambuscades , and holding
our French so closely besieged that no on e ventured
upon a ramble , to even the least distance , without
manifest danger of losing his life,- as was shown
by what happened to on e poor wretch ,who
,because
he did n ot obey the orders that were given him,
unhappily fell into the hands of these hunters of
men . Our Fathers , I say , seeing the imminence ofthese dangers , induced ou r French to have recourse
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
ces dangers li pre li an s , portere n t nos François aauoir
recours a la l ain te Vierge par quelque deuotion
extraordinaire . On fit des ieu fn es , des aum o l n es , on
in l titua les oraiion s de quarante heures , on offrit
p l ufieurs communions en fon honneur , bref on [ 13 ]fit vn vœu fol em n e l de ce l ebrer publiquement la
te l l e de fa pre fen tation , demandant à D ieu par l’en
trem il e de cette Mere des bontés , ou qu’ il arrêtait la
fureur de ces ennemis , ou qu’ il les exterminait , S
’
il
preuoyoit , qu’ ils ne l e vou l u li en t pas conu ertir , ny
rendre à la raifon ; Chofe étrange , tres-remarquable ,les Iroquois depuis ce temps-l à , n on feulement n
’ont
eu aucun auan tage de li us nous , mais ils on t perdu
beaucoup de leur monde , dans leurs attaques , Dieu
à la parfin , les a fi fortement touchés , qu’ ils ont de
mandé la paix .
La protedtion de cette R eyne des hommes des
Anges parut dans vn certain rencontre , d ’
vn e façon
toute particuliere . Vingt fix François , l e trouuan s
renfermés au milieu de deux cent Iroquois , [ 14 ]deu oyen t perdre la vie , fans le l ecours de cette Prin
ce li e . Ces Barbares , firent vn e decharge fur eux ,d
’
vu lieu fort proche ; Ils tireren t deux cent coups
fans tuer ny bl e li er pas vn des n o ltres . Ce n ’
e lt pas
qu’ ils ne manient tres—bien leurs armes ; mais c’e lt
que D ieu vou l oit , en cét attaque , verifier le prouerbe ,
qui dit que ce que D ieu garde e l t bien gardé . LeFils de Marie ne refu fe rien à l a l ain te Mere . Il
é carta les bales des ennemis , dirigea fi bien celles
des François , qu’ils renu erferen t quantité des All ie
geans , m yren t en fu itte ceux qui rechapperen t de
la mort , ou des bl e liu re s notables . I ’ay leu dans vn e
lettre,que les chemins par ou ils pa li eren t en
L E S RE L A TIONS D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
s’
en fnyan s , furent trouués , tous conners de leur l ang ;
qu’
aflés long-temps apres leur depart , [ 15] les
chiens rapportoien t des lambeaux de corps humains
en l ’habitation des François .
Il ne s ’eft pali é aucun mois de l ’année , difen t lesmemoires qui fon t venus iniques a nous , que ces
Cha li eurs ne nous ayent vifités a la fourdin e , tachan s
de n ou s furpren dre ; mais enfin le vingt fix iefm e de
Iu in, il en parut foyx an te , de ceux qui font nommés
par les Hurons , On n on taeron n on s , dem an dan s de
l oing vn l auf conduit pour quelques vu s d ’entre eux :
orians qu ’ ils e l toien t enuoyés de la part de toute leur
Nation , pour l çauoir fi les François auroien t le cœur
di l po l é à la paix .
C’
e ft chofe citrange , combien ces Infide l es , fe fien t
en nos paroles , quoy qu’ ils n
’
ign oren t pas , qu’ ils
nous ayent trahis , [ 16] quafi autant de fois , qu IIS on t
traité aneo nous : qu ' ils m eriten t en fu itte , le reci
proqu e . Nos François auoien t bien de li e in de leur
rendre le change faifan s main ba ll e de ces de l oyaux ,
de ces perfides : mais quand ils les virent auan cer
fans armes , fans de li en ce , cette fran chife am ol it
leur cœur , leur fit croire , que D ieu auoit exaucé
les prieres qu ’ ils luy auoien t pre fen tées , par les mains
de la fain ëte Vierge , a laquelle ils auoyen t demandé
d u l ecours , contre vn en n em y fi trai lÏre fi pu ili an t .
Quand ils furent entrés dans le Fort de nos Fran
çois , qu’ ils eurent ex pofé les pen fées , les defirs
de leur Nation : on ne parla plus que de confiance ,de paix , de bien ve il l an ce , vous eufliés dit
'
que
iam ais on ne s’
eftoit fait la [ 17] guerre , qu ’on
n’
e ftoit pas en dil pofition , de lamais la recomm an cer .
Nos François n ean tm oin s e l toien t toujours fous leurs
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
considerable time after their departure , [ 15] the dogs
kept bringing back fragments of human bodies to
the French settlement .
There has n ot passed , say the memoirs which
have reached us , a single month of the year in
which these H unters have not visited us by stealth
and tried to surprise us . But finally , on the twenty
sixth of j une , there appeared S ixty of them , belong
ing to those who are called by the Hurons , On n on
taeron n on s , requesting from afar a safe -conduct for
some of their number , and calling on t that they were
sent on behalf of their whole N ation to learn whether
the hearts of the French would be inclined to peace .
It is strange how much confidence these Infide l shave in our word , although they are well aware that
they have betrayed us [ 16] almost as often as they
have treated with us , and that consequently they
themselves deserve like usage . Our Frenchmen
were , indeed , planning to deceive them ,and to put
these treacherous and perfidious people to the sword ;but , when they saw them advancing unarmed and
defenseless , such frankness softened their hearts and
made them believe that God had granted the prayers
which they had o li ered him through the mediation
of the blessed Virgin , whom they had petitioned for
help against so faithless and powerful an enemy .
When they had entered the Fort of our Frenchpeople and had declared the purposes and wishes oftheir N ation , you would have said ,— since nothing
was any longer talked about but confidence and
p eace and good wifi ,— that they had never waged
any [ 17] war , and that they were indisposed ever to
begin it again . Our Frenchmen were,nevertheless
,
a lways under arms and all ready to fight,although
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
armes , tous pre fts de combattre , quoy que ce s
bonnes gens fu li en t parm y eux , fans verge ny ba l l on ,
l e con ten tan s de la feule parole qu ’on leur auoit
donnée , pour toute leur de ffen ce .
On les traita aneo amour , on recen leurs prefen s ,on leur en fit de reciproques , apres vn e reiouïf
l ance publique , de part dau tre : ils s ’en retour
n eren t en leur pays , rauis de ioye , d’
au o ir trouué des
e l prits , des cœurs amateurs de la paix . l e trouue
dans quelques memoires , qu’ ils don n eren t parole ,
qu ’on au roit bien—to lt de leurs n ouue l l e s , on nous
a mandé , que quelques [ 18] vu s de cette N ation , font
de fcen dus a Quebec aneo des prefen s , comme il l e
verra au Chapitre cin quie lm e , Où il e l l: parlé de la
paix . Pour ceux dont nous parlons pre fen tem en t ,
on nous dit , qu’en pa ll ant , a leur retour , par le Bourg
d’
On n eiou t , ils depl ieren t deuan t l es Habitans de
cette Bourgade,les pre fen s qu
’on leur auoit fait a
Montreal , racom ptan s mille biens des François : ce
fon t , difoyen t—ils , des D emons quand on les attaque
mais les plus doux , les plus courtois , les plus alia
bles , qui l oyen t au monde , quand on les traite d’amis
ils prote lteren t , qu’ ils al l oien t tout de bon , contracter
vne etroitte alliance aneo eux .
Les On n e ichr0n n on s voulurent e l tre de la partie .
Ils de l egu eren t quelque temps apres vu e [ 19] A m baf
fade à Montreal , aneo vn grand colier de porcelaine ;qui tém oign oit , que toute leur N ation vou l oit entrer
dans le traité de paix , que les On n on taeron n on s
auoien t com m an cé aneo les François . E t pour donner! quelque marque , de la fide l ité de leur parole , ils nous
don n eren t anis , que fix cent Iroquois A n n iehr0n n on s ,
e ltoien t partis de leur païs , à de li e in d’
en l euer le
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
those simple people were in our midst without rod
or stali , satisfied with the mere word that had been
given them for their sole defense .
They were treated with kindness ; their presents
were received,and others given them in return ;
and,after a public rejoicing on both sides , they
returned to their own country , overcome with j oy at
having found minds and hearts desirous of peace . I
find in some memoirs that they gave their promise
that news should soon be heard from them ; and we
have received word that some [ 18] from that Nation
came down to Quebec with presents , as will be seen
in the fifth Chapter , where the peace is described .
As for those of whom we are speaking at present ,we are told that
,on their way back , they called at
the Village of Onn e ion t and displayed , before the
Inhabitants of that Village , the presents that had
been given them at Montreal . They said a thousandthings in favor of the French : They are , said
they , D emons when they are attacked,but the
gentlest , most courteous , and most a li abl e people in
the world , when they are treated as friends . They
declared they were really going to contract a close
alliance with them .
The On n e ichronn on s , wishing to be part ies to it ,some time afterward sent an [ 19] E mbassy to Montreal , with a large porcelain collar , declaring that all
their N ation wished to enter into the treaty of peace
that the On n on taeronn on s had begun with the
French . And , in order to give some proof of theirsincerity , they informed us that six hundred Anniehron n 0n Iroquois had set ou t from their coun try with
the purpose of capturing the Village built by the
French at three rivers . This was found to be true .
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
Bourg des François , ba l l y aux trois r in ieres : ce quis ’e l t trouué veritable . Il faut con fe li er , que D ieu
e ft vn grand ouurier , qu ’ il fait en vn lour,pour
les hommes , ce que les hommes n’
o l eroien t quali
efperer en trente ans . Ie dirois qual i volontiers,
dans ce changement de l ’e fprit des Iroquois , ce que
difoien t deux Algonquins , il y a quelques années ,leur canot [20] ayant e lté brifé au milieu du grand
fleuu e , ils l e ietteren t fur vu e glace flottante , voy
ans qu ’ ils s’
al l oyen t perdre fans re fource , ils firent
vu e petite priere à D ieu , quoy qu’ ils ne fu li en t pas
encor Chre l tien s : Ils ne l’
auoyen t pas qn afi com
m an cée , que cette glace , quittant le courrant , qui
l’
em portoit , trau er l a droit aux rines de ce grand
fleuu e , où s’e l l ant doucement arre ltée , ils l e ietteren t
incontinent en lieu de fauu eté ; à me lme temps ,c ette glace qui leur auoit fern y de batteau , fut fra
ca li ée denaut leurs yeux par d’autres glaces . E ux
furpris de ce miracle , ne dirent autre chofe , pour
a 6tion de grace , que ces paroles : E n verité , il a en
bien-toit fait ; nous n’
au ion s pas encor acheué , le
dernier mot de nos prieres , qu’ il nous a de l iurés
[2 1] du naufrage . D ifon s le me lme a l ’egard des
Iroquois . Ils e l toien t remplis de rage de fureur
o n prie , on Ienine , on a recours à la S ain éte Vierge ,à fon cher E poux Saint Iofeph , tant a Quebec ,
-
quau x trois R iu ieres aMontreal , ces Barbares fontc hangés en vn moment . E n verité D ieu à en bient o l t fait , c
’ e lt vn grand ouurier , S ol i D eo honor
glor ia ,c ’e l t a luy l eul , que ce grand changement doit
eitre attribué .
Quelque temps apres le changement , le pourparler
de ces deux Nations , vn e trouppe d’
Iroquois Annie
R E LA TION OF 1652 53
It must be confessed that God is a great workman ,and that he does for man , in one day , what man
himself would scarcely dare hope to accomplish in
thirty years . In this change of disposition on the
part of the Iroquois,I would be almost willing to use
the words uttered by the Algonquins some years ago .
Their canoe [2 0] being wrecked in the middle of the
great river , they leaped upon a piece of floating ice ;and
,seeing that they were on the point of irrem edi
able destruction , they offered a little prayer to God ,although they were not yet Christians . They had
scarcely begun it when the piece of ice , leaving the
current that was bearing it away , crossed straight to
the bank of the great river , where it gently came to
rest , and the men forthwith sought a place of safety .
At the same time , the block of ice which had servedthem as a boat was shattered before their eyes by
other ice-blocks . Surprised at this miracle,they
said in thanksgiving only these words : Truly , it
was soon done ; we had not yet fin ished the last word
of our prayers , when he delivered us [2 1] from Ship
wreck . Let us say the same in regard to theIroquois . They were filled with rage and fury ; we
pray , we Fast , we have recourse to the Blessed Virgin
and to her dear Spouse , Saint j oseph , at Quebec aswell as at three R ivers and Montreal ; and in a mo
ment these Barbarians are changed . In truth,God
did his work quickly ; he is a master workman . S ol i
D eo honor et g lor ia; to him alone is this great changeto be attributed .
Some time after the change,and after the parley
of these two Nations , a band of A nn iehron n on Iro
quois invaded the Island of Montreal for the purpose
of molesting the French in their usual manner . A
L E S RELA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
hron n on s , s’ e l l ant ie ttée dans l
’
Ie de Montreal , pourm ol e lter les François a leur ordinaire , vn c braue
efcouade de Hurons Chre l tien s fum en an t la de li us ,decouurit leur pi lte s , donna la cha li e à ces cha li en rs ,fi [2 2 ] viuem en t , le propre i0nr de l
’
A li om ption de
la Sainte Vierge , qu’ ils prieren t [sc. prirent] le Capi
taine de ces Conrreurs , quatre des principaux de l afuitte , mettant le re l ie en deroute . Cette pril e a
bien l‘
eruy à la paix gen eral l e de tous ces peuples ,comme nous verrons cy-apres .
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UITES [VOL . 40
CHAPITR E I I I .
D E C E QU I S’
E ST PASSE A UX T R O IS R IU IE R E S .
E fuiuray, quali de m ot à mot , ce qui e l t couché
dans quelques lettres venuës de cette Bourgade .
Le Capitaine A on tarifati , dit l’
vn e de ces lettres ,que nos Saunages prirent l ’année pa li ée , fut li fortregretté de tous les cantons des Iroquois d ’
onbas l es
compatriotes , qu’
aufli toit que la [2 3 ] n ouu e l l e de l a
mort leur en fut portée , il l e fit vu e ligue generale ,vn e re fol ution , de tirer vn e fang1an te , vn e cruelle
vengeance de cette mort . Le m afiacre de Mon fieur
du Pl e lli s n o l tre Gouue rn eur , de quantité des princi
paux de n o l tre Bourg , n’
a li ouuit point leur rage : les
tourm en s horribles , qu’ils firent fon ffrir a tous leurs
pril on n iers , tant François que Saunages , n’
eteign iren t
point le feu de leur colere . Ils firent vn edit dans
tous leur pays , qu’on ne donn eroit plus la vie à aucun
Huron pris en guerre : ce qu ’ ils ex ecu teren t en fu itte ,
fur quelques m iferabl es qui tom beren t entre leurs
mains . Tout cela leur parut peu de cho l e : il fal l oit
pour les con fol er dans la perte d ’
vn li grand homme
en leur idée , en l euer la Bourgade des [2 4] trois
R iu ieres , mettre a feu a l ang tous les François ,tous les Saunages qu ’ ils y ren con treroien t .
Pour l ’execution de ce de li e in , vn e petite armée
d’
A n n iehron n ôs vint prendre l on quartier d ’
H yuer ,
a trois lieues ou enu iron de n o l tre Bourgade , dans lefond des bois ; croyant nous furprendre , lors que les
R E LA TION OF 1652 —53
CHAPTE R I I I .
OF WHAT OCCU R R E D A T THR E E R IVE R S .
SHALL follow , almost word for word , the con
tents of some letters that have come from this
Village . Captain A on tarisati , says on e of
these letters , whom our Savages captured last
year,was so deeply lamented by all the cantons of
the lower Iroquois , his fellow-countrymen , that , as
soon as the [2 3 ] news of his death reached them , a
general league was formed , and a resolution taken to
exact a bloody and cruel vengeance for his loss . The
murder of Monsieur du P lessis , our Governor , and
of many of the chief men of our Village , did not
glut their rage ; the horrible torments that they
made all their prisoners undergo , French as well as
S avage , failed to extinguish the fire of their wrath .
They issued an edict throughout their whole country
that no one should thenceforth spare the life of any
Huron taken in war ; and this order they afterward
executed upon some wretched victims who fell intotheir hands . But all this seemed a small matter tothem ; in their opinion , it was necessary , in order to
console them for the loss of so great a man,to take
the Village of [2 4 ] three R ivers and put to fire and
sword all the French and all the Savages that theymight find there .
To carry ou t this purpose , a l ittl e army of Anniehron n on s came and took up its Winter quarters at
the distance of three leagues or thereabout from our
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ ES UI TE S [VOL. 40
grandes neiges , les grands froids , nous feroyen t
pl u to l t pen fer au repos , qu’a la guerre : mais D ieu
qui ne vou l oit pas , nous donner en proye à ces loupsrau ilian s , nous fit de couurir les pil te s de leurs
e fpion s , qui s’
e ftoien t auan cés iniques à vn e l ieuë
proche de n o l tre Bourg . Cela nous mit dans la
de li enfiue . On fortifia nos B añion s , n os Courtines ,on redoubla les gardes , les fen tin e l l es : bref on l e
[2 5] tint fi bien à couuert , que ces E nnemis , dont
nous ne fçau ion s pas le nombre , ne trouuan s plus de
chali e , aux en n iron s du fort qu ’ils auoien t dre li é ,
furent contrains de fe carter , d ’aller chercher des
viure s , en leur pays , mais ils n’y firent pas vn bien
long fe j 0ur .
S i to it que la riu iere fut libre , on ne vit de tous
coites , que de petites bandes de coureurs , qui
tachoien t de fnrpren dre quelque cha li eur , ou quelque
Laboureur , ie tter ceux qui les voudroien t fauuer ,dans leurs em bu l cades . Nos Saunages l e voyan s li
re ferrés , l i fouuen t harcelés , prirent courage ,aym an s mieux mourir en com battan s , que d
’
e l i re
furpris , comme il arriu oit par fois a quelque Fran
çois , on à quelques vn s de leurs compatriotes . Ils l e
re fol n ren t d’
arre lter l’
in fol en ce [26] de ces T rafon s ,
qui nous ven oien t brauer , quali iniques a n os portes .
D ieu leur a donné benedict ion ; car quoy qu’ ils
fu li en t en petit nombre , ils ont fouu en t pour l u iuyd
’
a li és gro ll es trouppes : les con traign an s de quitter
leurs armes,leurs batteaux leur bagage , pour l e
fanuer dans les bois .
Le n eufiém e de May , vn petit canot Algonquinayant apperceu vn e em bu l cade ,
cachée à labry des
I lles des trois R iu ieres , s’enfuit à forces de rames , non
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
pour eu iter l e combat , mais pour mettre a terre en
vn cap , où il y auoit des François retranchés, vn e
femme qui e l toit dans leur petit batteau , fi toit quelle
fut en a liu ran ce,ils tournent vi l age vers les enne
mis , qui les pourfu iuoien t , ils n’
e fl oien t que trois
[2 7] hommes dans cette petite gondole , les Iro
quois rem p l i lioien t trois de leurs grands canots .
Quand ces Iroquois virent la re fo l u tiô de nos trois
guerriers qui tachoien t de les aborder,ils fu rët li
furpris , fi étôn és,qu ’ ils l e m irët en fu itte : croyan s
que d ’autres les pourroien t pourfu iure puis qu’ ils
e ftoien t de couuerts .
Le tre ifiém e du me lme mois , Monfieur de L au fonGouu ern eur pour l a Maie l té dans tout le pays , venant
viliter n o l tre Bourgade : il arriua , qu’a me lme temps
qu ’on tiroit le canon par honneur , pour le fal u er ,que quattre ou cinq Laboureurs , qui ten oien t lemanche de leurs charnes , dans la campagne voyfin e ,
furent in u e lt is par vu e trouppe d’
Iroquois , qui en
tu eren t deux . N os S aunages les pourfu iu iren t , mais
vn peu trop [2 8] tard : ils trouu eren t feulement le
bagage de ces voleurs , qu’ ils auoien t abandonné ,
pour courir plus legerement , pour l e mettre
p l uto lt hors des dangers d’
e l tre attrapés .
Le vingt -hu itiém e , ces Cha li eurs ayans tué vn petit
enfant François, quafi à la portée du fufil de n os
habitations,le can on ier , voian t qu ’ il ny auoit per
fon n e pour les pourfu iure , mit le feu a vn e piece
de canon,pour donner le fign al : mais le canon creua ,
rompit vn e iambe a ce panure homme , qui mourut
peu de iours a pres de l a bl e li ure .
Le tren tiém e ,cette me lme bande furprit vn ieun e
Huron,que quelques Laboureurs auoien t mis en
R E LA TION OF 1653—53
as fast as its paddles could urge it ,— n ot to avoid anengagement
, but to put ashore , on a cape where
some Frenchmen were intrenched , a woman who was
in their little boat . As soon as she was in safety ,they faced about toward the enemy that pursued
them , although they were only three [2 7] men in
that little gondola,while the Iroquois filled three of
their large canoes . When these Iroquois saw the
determination of our three warriors , who were try
ing to board them , they were so surprised and
astounded that they took flight , thinking that others
might pursue them , now that they were discovered .
On the thirteenth of the same month ,Monsieur
de Lauson, Governor for his Majesty of the whole
country , came to visit our Village . At the sametime that the cannon fired a salute in his honor , it
happened that four or five Husbandmen , who were
plowing in the neighboring field , were surrounded
by a band of Iroquois,who killed two of them . Our
S avages pursued them , bu t a little too [2 8] late ,fin ding only the baggage of these robbers , which
they had abandoned in order to run more freely and
put themselves the sooner out of danger of being
caught .
On the twenty-eighth , these Hunters havingkilled a little French child , almost within gunshot
of our settlement , the cannoneer , seeing that there
was no one to pursue them,discharged a piece of
artillery , in order to give the signal ; bu t the cannon
burst , and broke one of this poor man’s legs ; he died
from his wound , a few days later .
On the thirtieth , this same band surprised a
young Huron , whom some H usbandmen had posted
as sentinel at the edge of the wood , whil e they
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
fen tin e l l e,fur le bord du bois , pendant qu
’ ils trauail
l oien t à la terre . Ils le m en eren t dans vn [2 9] fond ,e n u iron à demie l ieu ë de la Bourgade : où ils le firent
a li eoir , pour luy demander en quelle po l tuœ nous
e l ti0n s , pour apprendre l ’
eftat de nos a ll aire s . Ce
bon garçon fut adroit , il leur parla en forte que ces
brigands , ne croyan s point qu’on les deût l u iure s ’ar
re l teren t vn peu trop long-temps en ce lieu pour
leur bien , car nos Hurons furu en an s , non feulement
leur firent lacher leur proye , mais ils en prirent encor
quelques-vn s deux prifon n iers , qu’ ils ram en eren t au
fort . l e l erois trop long , il ie vou l ois rapporter
toutes les attaques , les pourfu ittes , les pri l es qui
l e font faites de part d ’autre és en u iron s de cette
Bourgade , venons au liege qu’ ils on t fait a leur mode .
Quoy que les S aunages ne [30] plantent pas de fieges
a la façon des E uropeans,ils ne manquent pas nean
moins de con du itte dedans leurs guerres : en voicy
vn e prenne . Les Iroquois A n n iehron n on s , ayans
de li e in d’
en l euer la Bourgade des trois R iu ieres ,
p l u to l t par furprife , que par force , ils en uoyeren t
prem ierem en t , autant que ie peux con j eëturer , quel
ques petites trouppes detachées de leur gros , à Montreal
,vers Quebec : afin d ’occuper n os François ,
leur o l ter l ’ennie , aux vn s de de fcen dre aux trois
R iu iere s , aux au tre s dy monter ; par ce moyen
em pe l cher le l ecours , qu’on auroit peu donner à la
place qu ’ ils vou l oyen t prendre .
‘
Cela fait , ils l e vinrent cacher iniques au nombre de
cinq cent,dans vn e ance fort voyfin e du [3 1] Bourg
des trois R iuiere s : la pointe qui forme cette ance ,les couuroit en forte , qu
’on ne les pouuoit apperce
noir . La nuit ven uë , ils l e diuiferen t en trois bandes ,
L E S RELA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
ils enuoieren t vn canot de dix hommes , dans de
petites I ll cs qui font toutes voifin cs du fort , du
Bourg des trois R iu iere s , ils firët pali er onze canots,
au dela du grand fleuuc vis a vis de ce fort . Le re l i el e cacha dans les bois derriere n o ltre Bourgade , volcyleur penice dans cette condu itte .
Comme ils voyoien t des bleds d Inde plantés dans
ces petites I lles , ils creuren t , que ceux a qui ces bleds
appartcn oicn t , vicn droicn t du matin trauail l er à leur
champs , comme c’
c l t la cou l tum c , que ces dix
hommes , qui e l toien t en em bu l cadc , prendroicn t [3 2 ]
que l qu’
vn , qu’ ils em m en eroien t dans leur petit bat
tean , pall ant deuan t le fort , afin de porter les Fran
çois à les pourfu iure ; alors les onze canots , qui
c l toicn t cachés à l ’autre rine du fleuue , vi en droicn t
au l ecours , en fu itte , ils s’
im agin oicn t que les
François s’
c fchau li an s fort iroicn t de leur Bourg ,
l e vicn droien t ietter à la foule fur les bords de cegrand fleuuc , partie pour s
’
em barqucr , de li aire ces
douze canots : partie pour voir ce combat : pendant
qu e les vn s les autres , [ croient occupés à voir ,à combattre , le gros qui e itoit caché derricr la Bour
gade , la deuoit facil cm ët fn rpren dre , citant dep0ur
u cuë de la plus part de l e s Habitans . Mais la chofe
ne rcufiit pas comme ils preten doicn t : car nos
Saunages , à qui ces bleds [3 3 ] appartcn oien t ne s’
él oi
gn crcn t point de leurs cabanes ce iour là , qui e l toit
le vingtième d ’
A ou ft , ainfi pcrfon n c ne branna
eux dem euran s cachés , nous dans l ’ignorance , que
nous euflion s de il manuais voifin s .
Le lendemain quelques be l tiau x s ’eitans egarés ,
les Habitans François prieren t des S aunages de les
aller chercher dans les bois,ou fur les rines du grand
R E L A TION OF 1652—53
into three bands , sen t a canoc with ten men to some
small Islands very near the fort and the Village of
three R ivers , and caused eleven canoes to proceed to
the farther side of the great river , opposite this fort .
T he rest concealed themselves in the woods behind
our Village . In this disposition of their forces their
purpose was as follows
S eeing some indian corn planted on those little
Islands , they thought that those to whom this corn
belonged would come in the morning to work in their
fi elds , according to their custom ; and that the ten
men in ambush would capture [3 2 ] on e of these and
carry him away in their little boat,passing in front
o f the fort , in order to incite the French to pursue
them ; and then the eleven canoes that were concealedon the other side of the river would come to the
rescue . Thereupon , as they imagined , the French
would get excited , come ou t of their Village,and
rush in crowds to the banks of this great river,partly
t o embark and put to ron t these twelve canoes,
partly to see the engagement ; and , while these were
engaged ,— som e in fighting , and others in looking
on ,— the main body , concealed behind the Village ,
would easily surprise it , as it would be emptied of
the greater part of its Inhabitants . But the thing
did n ot succeed according to their intention ; for ourSavages , to whom that corn [3 3 ] belonged , did notgo away from their cabins on that day
,which was
the twentieth of August ; and so no on e moved ,thcy remaining in hiding , and we being unawarethat we had such bad neighbors .
On the following day , some cattle having gonea stray , the French Inhabitants asked some Savagest o go and look for them in the woods
,or on the
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
fleuue : ceux qui l e mirent en deuoir d ’
ex ecu ter cette
com m ifli on , re tourn erent bien- toit fur leurs pas ,difan s qu ’ ils auoie n t veu les pi l tes d
’
vn grand nombre
de perfon n es , que l’
e n n em y n’
eftoit pas loing . Ame lme temps quelques m oifl0n n eurs qu ittan s leur
ouurage , coururent vers la Bourgade , a li euran s qu’ils
auoien t veus de n ouueaux [34 ] vi l ages , des gens
ve l ins d’
vn e façon extraordinaire , qui l e ten oien t a
couucrt dans les bois . On en uoya des cfpi0n s qui
m’ayans rien rencontré , on fit pali er ces anis pour des
craintes m a l fondées , ou pour des ten eurs paniques .
Le vingt-deu x iefm e du melme mois , on retourna
au trauail des m oi li on s , pour all urer les m oi li on
n eurs , on pofa quelques fen tin e l l es à l’orée des bois .
Les Iroquois impatiens , coururent fur l ’vn e de !cesfen tin el l es pour içanoir l
’
c l tat de n o l tre habitation .
Cét homme gagne au pied , mais ils l’
attraperen t ,
luy don n eren t deux ou trois coups de mali c , ou de
hache fur la te l l e , qui l’
offen ceren t beaucoup , mais
ces coups ne furent pas mortels . On ne douta plus
pour lors , que les ennemis [3 5] ne fu li cn t en
campagne , ou p l u to l l dans les forets .
Le vingt -troifiém e ils parurent fur l 'eau , aufli bien
que fur la terre . Le canot qui s ’
e l toit caché dedans
les I lles , dont i’
ay fait mention , voyant que perfon n e
ne paroi li oit , quitte fon po l te pour tran erfer la
riu iere ,pour s ’aller ioin dre a ces onz e batteaux
que l ’
en n cm y auoit mis en em bu l cade fur l ’autre
rine . On 1ny donna la chali e , non tant pour le com
battre,que pour découurir par fon moyen , il les
ennemis e l toien t en grand nombre . Mais comme onne le pût attraper , le Capitaine du fort enuoya vn c
cha l ouppc armée de bons hommes au haut du fleuue .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
B oontons-l e parler , i’
ay tiré ce qui fuit de la copie
de l ’
vn e de l e s lettres . A peine nos gens étoicn t -ils[36] e l oign és d
’
vn quart de l ieu ë du fort , qu’ils
apperccuren t vn grand nombre de canots , echoüés
dans vn c an cc : ils déchargent deli us leurs armes à
feu , aufli-to l t reprennent leur route vers le fort .
Le Tambour , à qui i’
au ois commandé de donner
quelques coups de baguettes fur l a cai ll e , en cas que
la chal ouppe eut découu ert l’
en n em y, me rapella
dans le fort ; comme i’en approchois , ic vy vn grand
nombre d’
Iroquois , conrans à bride abbatu ë , comme
on dit , a trauers les champs , fail an t mine de venir
attaquer la Bourgade . Ie crie aux armes : ie fay
fermer les portes , rouler deux pieces de canon ,
que i’
au ois difpofé pour ce fu j e t . Ces Barbares au
bruit de ce tonnerre , fe ietten t fur des be lt iau x qui
pa li oien t proche du Bourg , ils les [3 7] pondent dans
le bois , les ayans m afi acrés , ils courent fur les
rines du grand fleuu e , déchargean s leurs fufil s fur
n o ltre chal ouppe , qui l e vit a li ail l ie de tous co l iés :car les onze ou douze canots , dont nous anons parlé ,vinrent fondre fur elle , la voulant contraindre de
s ’approcher de la terre pour e itre battue, par eau
par terre . On fit feu de tous co l tés : l’air fut bien
to l t rem p ly de flammes de fumée . l e fit tirer plus
de vingt coups de canon en vn quart d ’
heure , qui
n’
eurcn t autre e li et , pour ce que n os boulets n’
cfl oicn t
pas de calibre , que de faire retirer l’
en n em y, don
ner pa li agc à n o l trc cha l ouppe , qui l e de fendit vail
l am m en t , auec vn bon-heur : car nos gens tireren t
bl e li cren t quelques Iroquois , pas vn deux nerecent aucun dommage .
[3 8] C es demis D emons voyan s qu’ ils auoien t e lté
RELA TION OF 1652—53
Let us hear him speak ; I have taken what followsfrom the copy of on e of his letters . 4 S carcely had
our people [36] proceeded a quarter o f a league from
the fort , when they perceived a large number of
canoes that had stranded in a cove ; they discharged
their fircarm s at these , and immediately resumed
their course toward the fort . The D rummer , whom
I had ordered to give some drum—beats in case the
shallop should discover the enemy , called m e back
into the fort ; as I approached it , I saw a great num
ber of Iroquois running with loose rein , as the saying
is , across the fields , and acting as if they were com
ing to attack the Village . I called to arms , had the
gates closed and two pieces of ordnance discharged ,which I had arranged for this purpose . Those Bar
barian s , at the noise of this thunder , rushed upon the
cattle that were passing n ear the Village , [3 7] drove
them into the woods , and , after butchering them ,
ran to the banks of the great river , discharging their
muskets at our shallop . The latter found itself
assailed on all sides ; for the eleven or twelve canoes
that we have mentioned , came and pounced upon it ,trying to force it to approach the shore , that it mightbe beaten both by land and by water . Fire wasopened on all sides , and soon the air was full of ñames
and smoke . In a quarter of an hour , I had more than
twenty cannon Shots fircd ,— which , because our halls
were n ot of the right caliber , produced no farther
effect than to make the enemy retire and give passage
to our shallop . This defended itself valiantly and
with success ; for our people used their firearm s and
wounded a number of Iroquois,while not on e of
them received any injury .
[3 8] These half—Demons , seeing that they had
L E S RELA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
maltraités , al l ere n t décharger leur colere fur nos
bleds d ’
indes , fur nos bleds François . Ils coup
poien t tout ce qu ’ ils pouuoien t rencontrer , bru ll an s
les chârruës , les charettes l ai li ées en la campagne ,pour mettre le feu dans les tas de pois , de bled
qu'
ils ram a lioicn t : ils mirent le feu en quelques
m aifon s écartées , tu eren t les befi iau x des Peres ,qu
’
on n’
auoit peu retirer a ll és to lt : en vn mot , on
eut dit qu ’ ils e l toicn t enragez , tant ils faifoien t
paroiltre de fureur .
Ie fi rouler vn canon,fur vn platon , ie le fi tirer
de lius eux ; les Saunages s’
auan ceren t , faifan t quel
ques cfcarm ouche s , dans ces petits combats vn de
nos Algonquins recent vn coup de fufil [3 9] au
gen oüil , nous bl e li afm es , tu afm e s quelques
Iroquois .
E nfin ces Barbares l e retireren t faifan t mine d’
auoir
a li oupy leur rage , leur vengeance : mais a de li e in
de s ’approcher la nuit de la Bourgade pour y mettre
le feu , n’
e ftan t cn u iron n ée en pl ufien rs endroits que
de gros arbres . Nous fu fm es fous les armes tant
que la nuit dura , ie redoubl ay les fen tin e l l es : le
Trompette,le Tambour ioüeren t quali toûj 0urs au
fort . On n’
en ten doit par tout qu e ces paroles , qui
va là. : la R edoute tira pl ufieurs coups d'
arquebu fe ,
il bien que l’
en n em y qui faifoit l es approches , épou
uan té par ces bruits , de fc l pera de nous poun oir ny
prendre , ny furprendre .
P endant cette nuit , arriua vn canot Algonquin quiven oit de la cha li e , qui fut bien e l tonn é de [40] l e
voir fain faune au milieu de tant de dangers . Il
arriua anil i vn canot François , qui nous dit que le
Pere Poncet auoit c ité pris au Cap rouge , és enu iron s
L E S RE LA TION S D E S ] ÉS UITE S [VOL . 40
de Quebec ; qu’
vn e e l couadc de quelques François
quelques S aunages Chre l tien s bien re fol us , pour
fu iuoicn t ceux qui l ’
auoien t en l eué : mais le rencontre
des Iroquois , qui nous ten oien t comme a ll i egés , leur
fit changer de de li ein . D ieu nous enuoioit ce
renfort , qui re l eu an t n o l tre courage , a li oibl it autant
le cœur de n os E nnemis .
Le lendemain vingt—quatrième d’
A ou l t , ils l e
répandirent vn c autre fois dans nos petites campagnes ,recom m an çan s leurs degats , n o l tre canon les em pe l cha
bien de s ’approcher de trop prés , mais il n’
arre l ta
point nos Hurons , [4 1] qui ayans vn c pall ion de fça
noir des n oun c l l es de leurs parens , de leurs amis ,pris autrefois en guerre , deu cnu s Iroquois , s
’ap
prochcren t doucement des E nnemis pour leur parler .
S ’ eitans reconnus les vus les autres , la confiance l e
gl ili a petit a petit de part d ’autre , li bien qu’en
peu de temps , ce ne furent plus que conferences ,
qu’
en trctien s d’
Iroquois au e c les Hurons : cela
continua quelques iours en forte qu ’on eut dit , que
iam ais on ne s’
eûoit battu . N ous faifion s bonne
garde de n o l tre co l té , chacun demeurant en fon po l i e ,fous les armes . Quelques Hurons du party E nne
m y, l e vinrent rendre à nous . Com me on vid ces
grands pourparlers , qu ’on ne dou toit point que les
E nnemis ne chercha licn t l’
occafion [4 2 ] de nous
furpre n dre , il fut p ropofé en la m aifon de Ville , fi
on les trom peroit eux m e fm es : mais il ne fut pas
inge à propos , pour plufieurs rail 0n s .
E nfin on en vint iniques l à , que les E nnemis s’ap
prochoien t de nous fans armes , ils nous firent melme
des pre fen s à diu erfes fois , prote l tan s qu’ ils n ’
au oien t
plus d ’
am crtnm e , ny de venin dedans le cœur . Vn
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
tion,were in pursuit of his captors , bu t , meeting
with the Iroquois,— who were holding us , as it were ,
besieged,— they were led to change their plan . God
sent us this reinforcement , which raised our courage
and depressed proportionately the Spirits of our
E nemies .
On the next day , the twenty-fourth of August ,they once more dispersed throughout our little fields
and renewed their ravages . Our cannon prevented
them from coming too near , but did not deter our
H urons , [4 1] who ,— being cager to learn news of
their relatives and friends who had formerly been
taken in war , and had become Iroquois ,— quietly
approached the E nemy , in order to speak to them .
When they had recognized one another , confidence
Spread little by little , on one side and the other, to
such an extent that in a short time there was nothing
to be seen but conferences and interviews between
Iroquois and Hurons ; and this continued for several
days , so that on e would have said there had never
been any war between them . We kept careful guard
on our side , each man remaining at his post , and
under arms . S ome Hurons of the E nemy ’ s side
came and gave themselves up to us . When these
earnest parleys were noticed , and it was n ot doubted
that the E nemy were seeking an opportunity [4 2 ] to
surprise us , the question whether we should not
practice deception upon them themselves was pro
posed in the T own house ; bu t , for several reasons ,this was deemed inadvisable .
At last , matters reached the point that the E n emy approached u s without arms
,and even made us
presents on several occasions , - protesting that they
had n o more bitterness or venom in their hearts . A
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
Huron Iroqu ifé s’e l l ant gl i li é parm y nos gens ,
emmena au camp E n n em y vn c fien n e fille , qu’ il
rencontra parm y nous , luy les Iroquois apprirent
beaucoup de chofes de l a bouche , bonnes m auuaifes .
E lle leur dit , qu’ il nous e l toit venu quelque l ecours ,
qu’
vn e compagnie de Hurons auoit pris des Iroquois
a Montreal , qu 'on atten doit de iour a autre , les
vi6torieu x, [4 3 ] les vaincus . C e l a fut cau fc de leur
retardement : car dans les pre l en s que nous nous
e l tion s faits les vn s aux autres , ils nous auoien t
donné parole , qu’ ils s ’en retourn eroien t bien-to lt en
leur pays , mais ils voulurent attendre le retour de
ces Hurons , qui am en o ien t de leurs gens prifon n icrs .
Dans cette treve ou attente , ils parl eren t de rendreprifon n icrs pour prifon n icrs , ils promirent de rame
ner l e P ere Poncet , le François qui auoit e lté pris
auec luy .
Le tren tie fm e du mois d ’
A ou l t , les Hurons retour
nans de Montreal , auec leurs prifon n icrs Iroquois
A n n iehron n on s , tom beren t non pas tous , mais en
partie entre les mains des E nnemis qui les atten
doien t . N ous dirons au Chapitre de la paix comme
tout [44] fe pali a entre les Iroquois pris par les
Hurons : il y auoit vn Capitaine de confideration , il
parla fortement à l es compatriotes , qu’il tronna de ll a
tous difpofés à la paix , pouli es par vn e l prit plus
fecre t , qu e ce l uy qui anime les hommes .
Ils en uoyeren t promptement deux canots en leur
pays,pour em pe fcher qu
’on ne fit aucun mal au P ere ,à fon compagnon , fi on les troun oit encor en vieapres auoir ren uoyé les Hurons en n o l tre fort , les
principaux d ’entre eux nous ven oien t vi liter , en tran s
couchan s en n o l tre Bourgade auec autant de tém oi
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
gn age d’
a li euran ce , que 5 Ils enli ent cité nos plus
fide l es , plus con fian s amis . Bref ils nous ont lai ll e
quatre ou cinq de leurs gens en oftage , prote l tan s
qu ’ ils ram en eroien t [45] le P ere dans peu de iours ,qu ’ ils viendroien t traiter la paix au ec nous , mais
vn c paix veritable du fond du cœur : voila vnabregé de deux lettres venuës des Trois R iu ieres , où
ces chofes fu fdites l e font pa li écs , ce qui fuit c l t tiré
d’
vn e troifiém e qui a cité c l orite par vn P ere de n o ltre
Compagnie .
Nous attendons de iour a autre le refu l tat d’
vn
Con fe il , ou d’
vn e a li em bl ée generale , que tiennent
nos E nnemis en leur pays , fur la propofition de la
paix qu ’ ils nous on t faite eux-m efm cs , apres mille
aétes d’
hoftil ité , mille e li orts de prendre n o l tre
Bourgade des Trois R iu ieres . Ils ont e l té fide l es
dans la treve de quarante iours , qu’ ils nous auoien t
accordées : car ils n ’ont point paru du tout pendant
ce temps- l à, [46] nous anons marché fur terre ,
vogué fur les eaux , fans aucun manuais rencontre .
I’
adj ou l teray pour con cl ufion de ce Chapitre , que les
On n on taeron n on s de fcendan s à Quebec pour traiterde la paix , les A n n iehron n on s , dont nous venons de
parler, de l egu eren t quelques-vu s d
’
en tr’
eux pour
entrer dans ce me lme traité , comme il fera remarqué
dans le Chapitre de la paix .
R B L /1TION OF 1652 53
much exhibition of confidence as if they had been
our most faithful and constant friends . In short ,they left us four or five of their people as hostages ,solemnly promising that they would bring back [4 5]the Father in a few days , and that they would come
and treat of peace with us— a peace , too , which
should be genuine and sincere . The foregoing i s
an abridgment of two letters that came from Three
R ivers , where the above events occurred ; what fol
lows is drawn from a third which was written by a
Father of our S ociety .
We are daily awaiting the result of a Council or
general assembly , that our E nemies are holding in
their own country , on the proposal of peace whichthey themselves made to us after a thousand acts of
hostility , and a thousan d attempts to take our Village
of Three R ivers . They were faithful in the truce
of forty days which they granted us ; for during that
time nothing at all was seen of them , and [46] we
went our way , on both land and water , without any
hostile encounter . I will add , in concluding this
Chapter , that , when the Onn on taeron n on s were on
their way down to Quebec to treat of peace , the
A n n iehron n on s , of whom we have just spoken , dele
gated some of their own number to enter into this
same treaty , as will be related in the Chapter on the
peace .
D E L A PR IS E D E L A D E L IU R A N C E D U PE R E IOSE PH
PON CE T .
E S Iroquois ayans m afi acre z au mois de Iu in
quelques François au Cap rouge , lieu éloignéde trois lieues ou enu iron du fort de Quebec ,
furpriren t au [4 7] me lme endroit le vingt ie lm e du
mois d ’
A ou l t dernier pa li é le P . Iofeph Poncet ,vn François nommé Maturin Fran chctot . Ce bon
P ere , voyant qu’
vn e panure ve l ue Françoise auoit dugrain fur la terre , qu ’ elle m an quoit de bras pour
le ram a li er , s’en al l oit en ce quartier là , chercher
quelques bonnes perfon n e s , qui la vou l u li en t aider àfaire l a petite re col te . I l ven oit de parler au François que ie viés de nommer , quelques Iroquois fortan s
de la forcit voi l in e , où ils e ltoien t cachez en em bu l
cade , l e j ettercn t fur eux feparém en t,
à l ’ im prou i l te , les en traifn cren t . On a commandé au Pere
a l ou retour , de coucher fur le papier l a pr ife ,
toutes l es auan tures , il a obey au ec repugnance ,fouhaittan t qu e l es Croix ne fu li en t con nu ës [4 8]que du R oy des crucifiés : mais vn c partie de l es
memoires a c ité dechirée par les A ngl ois . Nous
l uiuron s dans ce Chapitre ce qui e lt venu entre nos
mains,apres auoir rapporté deux ou trois petits mots
d’
vn e lettre c l orite fur ce fu j e t .
S i toit que la n ouue l l e fut apportée à Quebec , que
les Iroquois auoien t en l cué le P . Poncet , comme il
e ftoit aimé de tout le monde , non feulement on en
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
concent vn c tril te li e generale : mais trente ou
quarante François , quelques Saunages Chre lt ien s ,prirent vn c forte re fol u tion de le retirer des mains
de ces Barbares , quoy qu’ il leur en confi ait . Ils
m on teren t en canot le lendemain de l a prife , à de li e inde preuen ir l
’
E n n em y, l’
a l l an t attendre en quelque
endroit où il deuoit [49] pali er , pour le furpren dre
au pa li agc . On fait icy tant de prieres , en public
en particulier , depuis leur depart , que l e ne puis
pe n fer autre chofe , ou que D ieu nous le rendra , ou que
par fon moyen , il donnera la paix au dedans , au
dehors de ce panure pais . E t plus bas das la me lme
lettre,le P . Poncet fut pris le vingtiém e d
’
A ou l t fur
l e l oir , le vingt-vn iém e , nos coureurs le fu iuiren t
fur la nuit , voila , que le vingt-fix iém e , l’
vu des
canots qui e l toien t allés donner la cha li e aux voleurs ,qu i l
’
em m en n en t , nous rapporte n ouue l l e , que ces
coureurs l e fon t arre l tés aux Trois R iu ieres , pour
fe courir la Bourgade , in fe ltée par cinq ccn s Iroquois ,qui la tiennent bouclée , rodans aux enu iron s de tous
co l tés . Ceux qui font retournez dans ce canot , nous
[50] difen t qu’ ils ont trouué proche l ’ I l l e de fain ét
E loy , deux vi l ages crayonnez auec du charbon , fur
vn arbre , dont on auoit en l eué l’écorce , les noms
du P ere Poncet , de Mathurin Fran chetot , écrits aude ii ou s de ces deux vifages . D e plus , qu
’ ils ont
remontré [sc . rencontré] au melme endroit , vn liuredans lequel e l toit e l crit le l en s de ces paroles : Six
H urons Iroqu ife z , quatre A n n iehronn on s , emmen
nent le P . Poncet , Mathurin Fran chetot , ils ne
nous on t encore fait aucun mal . C ’e l t leur cou l tum e
de traiter doucement leurs prifon n icrs , tant qu’
ils
font encor dans la crainte d’e li re attrappez . Voila
RE LA TION OF 1652-53
beloved by all ; but thirty or forty Frenchmen , and
some Christian Savages , firm ly resolved to rescue
him from the hands of those Barbarians , whatever itmight cost them to do so . They launched their
canoes on the day following his capture , purposing
to forestall the E nemy by going to wait for them in
some spot which they must [49] pass , in order to
surprise them as they went by . So many prayers
have been o li ered here , in public and in private , since
their departure , that I can bu t think either that God
will restore him to us , or that by his means he will
give peace to this poor country , both within and
without its borders . And , farther down in the sameletter : Father P oncet was captured on the twen
t ie th of August , toward evening ; on the twenty-first ,
toward night , our scouts followed him ; and on the
twenty-sixth , on e of the canoes that had gone in
pursuit of the robbers who were carrying him O li
brought back news to us that those scouts had stopped
at Three R ivers to give help to the Village , as it washarassed by five hundred Iroquois , — who were hold
ing it closely beset , and were prowling about the
neighborhood in all directions . Those who returned
in this canoc [50] told us that they found , near the
Island of saint E loy , two faces drawn with charcoalon a tree from which the bark had been removed ,and the names of Father Poncet and Mathurin Franche tot written beneath these . Furthermore , they
said they had found in the same place a book in which
was written , in substance , these words : Six Hurons ,turned Iroquois , and four A n n iehronn on s are carry
ing o li Father Poncet and Mathurin Fran che tot .
They have n ot yet done us any injury . It is their
custom to treat their prisoners gently as long as they
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
ce qui m ’a e lté re crit fur la prife de ce bon P ere .
Venons maintenant aux lambeaux de l e s memoires ,dont l e feray vn petit abbregé .
[51] Nous arriuafm es , dit- il , à vn c R iu iere fortrapide , où l
’armée qui e l toit allée aux Trois R iuieres
auoit campé . Le Barbare qui m ’
auoit pris au Caprouge , m
’
ofta le R eliquaire que ie portois au col ,le pendit au l i en : comme il couroit , certain iour dâs
les bois , ce R eliquaire s’
ouurit , toutes les R eliques
furent perdues , il ne re fta dans la petite boëte de
cu iurc , qui com pofoit ce R eliquaire , qu’
vn petit
papier , fur lequel i’
auois c l cry de mon propre l ang,
comme i 'e ltois encore au païs des Hurons , les noms de
n os Peres m artyrife z en l’
A m eriqu c , vn c petite Orai
l'
on , par laquelle ie dem an dois à N o l trc Seigneur ,vn c mort violente pour fon fernice , la grace d ’y
répandre tout m on l ang. D e forte , qu’ayant adroite
ment retiré ce papier , [52 ] d’entre les mains de ce
Barbare , ie voyois fans ce ll e deuan t mes yeux, l a
fen ten ce de ma mort , écrite de mon propre l ang , il
bien que ie ne m ’en pouuois dedire . I ’anois neant
moins vn e pen fée , que ces grandes ames , ces
branes courages , qui m’
auoien t precedez en ce com
bat , auoien t cité éli e6tiu em en t immolez , comme ayans
des vertus veritables , que moy qui n ’en auois que
les ombres , la figure , ne l erois crucifié qu’en
peinture .
I ’anois encor dans m on B reu iaire , vn c Image de
S . Ignace , au ec N o l tre Seigneur portant l a Croix ,
m yl tere propre de n o ltre Compagnie , auquel ayant
toûj ours cité fort afieét ion n é , il luy a pleu de m’y
donner quelque part , dans les fatigues extraordinaires
que i ’
eu s dans ce chemin , [53 ] l’
Im age de N o ltre
L E S RELA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
Dame de P itié , entourée des cinq playes de fon Fils ,m
’
e l l oit aufli re l l ée ; c’
c l l oit ma plus grande recrea
tion , m on recon fort , dans mes de trc li cs : mais la
crainte que ces faints portraits ne fu li en t m éprife z ,me fit refondre de m ’en priuer , de les cacher dans
vn buill on .
l e garday vn c petite Couronne de No l l re Seigneur ,qui me re ll a feule de tout ce que ie portois fur moy ,quand ie fus pris . l e la cachay il bien qu
’elle ne fut
iam ais apperceuë de ces Barbares .
Pour rcu en ir à n o l tre voyage . Quand il fut
qu e l l ion de pali er le Torrent , dont i’
ay parlé : on me
commanda de le trau erfcr a beau pied , i’
e l l ois de l la
tout m oüil l é , ayant pali é la nuit , dans des herbiers
tous trempez de la bruine , [54] de la rofée de la
nuit , qui fut fort froide . I’
cu s de l ’eau iniques à la
ceinture dans ce Torrent ; tout cela , auec le manque
de nourriture , me cau fa de grandes coliques , des
peines ex cefli u es . l e ne l aili ay pas n ean tm oin s de
faire toutes mes deuotion s à l ’ordinaire , me con fol an tdoucement auec N o l l re S eigneur , de la main duquel
ie prenois cette Croix , non pas de la main des
hommes .
Il me prit dans ces trauaux , vn fi grand engour
dili em en t en la jambe gauche , ie receuois vn c fi
grande incommodité , d’
vn e gro ll e am pou l l c qui me
vint fous le melme pied gau che , que mes ho l l es
furent contrains de faire vn gifl e , auquel ils ne s ’
at
ten doien t pas . Ils n ’
auoien t plus qu’
vn morceau de
chair bouillie , [55] qu’ ils auoien t gardée de leur der
nier repas , croyan s arriu er en lieu , où ils trouueroicn t
des viures : ils le m an geren t , dans la melme ho l l e l
l erie , où nous au iôs logez en tout n o l l re voyage , fous
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
hardships that I underwent on this journey . [53 ]The P icture of Our Lady of P ity , surrounded by thefive wounds of her Son , was also left me , and formed
my greatest recreation , and my consolation in dis
tress . But the fear that these hallowed portraits
might meet with some indignity , made me decide to
forego their possession and hide them in a bush .
I kept a little Crown of Our Lord , which was theonly thing left me of all that I had on my person
when I was captured . I concealed it so well that it
was never perceived by those Barbarians .
To return to our j ourney : when it came to cross
ing the Stream of which I have spoken , I was ordered
to wade through it . I was already soaking wet ,having passed the night in the tall grass , which wasall saturated with drizzling rain [54] and the dew of
night , the nights being very cold . I was wet up to
the waist in this Stream ; and all that , with the want
of nourishment , caused me a severe colic and excess
ive pains . I did not , however , cease to perform all
my devotions as usual , taking comfort quietly withOur Lord , from whose hand , and n ot from the hand
of men , I received this Cross .
Amid these labors , I was seiz ed with so gr eatnumbness in the left leg , and was so severely in con
ven ien ced by a large blister under this same left foot ,that my hosts were compelled to halt for a time , a
thing which they had n ot expected . They had only
a m orsc l of boiled meat left, [55] which they had
kept from their last meal , thinking to reach a place
where they would find provisions . They ate it at
the same inn where we had lodged throughout ou r
journey ,— under the vault of Heaven ; and , as I feltextremely exhausted , I had recourse to my two
la voûte du Ciel ; comme ie me l en tois extreme
ment épu ifé , i’
eus recours ames deux Patrons , S aint
R aphaël , Sainte Marthe : leur difan t doucementen m on cœur , que i
’
aurois bien befoin de quelque
rafraifchiifem en t , dans la foif que i’
en durois , d’
vn
peu de boüil l on , dans mon épu ifem en t . A peineauois-j c formé ces ien tim en s en m on cœur , que
l’
vn de nos côdu él eurs , m’
apporta quelques prunes
l anuages , qu’ il tronna , par grande auan turc , dans les
bois : car plus de fix ccn s hôm es auoien t pa li é par
cét endroit . Sur la nuit , ayant en bien de la peine
[56] d’
auoir vn peu d ’eau nette , pource que nous
c itions dans vn vilain marais , ie me conchay ,m
’
en dorm y, fans autre recomfort que de ma l affitude :
mais ie fus bien e l l ôn é , que m on boite m’
eueil l a ,
me pre l en ta vn bouillon , fans fçauoir comment il
l’
auoit pû faire .
Le lendemain matin , il fallut partir fans defieun er ,marcher au ec vn c jambe , vn pied eûropié , vn
corps tout rompu : i ’attribu ë la force , que D ieu me
donna,à mes chers Patrons , notamment à S . Iofeph ,
auquel i ’
au ois vn grand recours . B il ans arriu e z , àdeux heures apres midy , proche de la riuiere qui
defcend au quartier des H ol l andois , au delà de la
quelle e l l placé le premier Bourg des Iroquois , on
nous commanda de nous dépouiller , [57] de quitter
ce qui nous re l l oit de nos habits François ; n’ayant
plus qu’
vn brayer , on ietta fur mon dos , vn c houppe
lande bl eu ë toute dechirée , on lai li a à mon com
pagn on ,vn vieux pourpoint de toile tout rompu .
Quelques Saunages de n oil re bande , ayans pris le
denaut, e l l oien t retournez iniques a cette riu iere auec
leurs femmes , apportan s des epics de bled d’
inde ,
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
des citrouilles du pa s à nos con du éteurs , iam ais on
ne nous en pre fen ta vn l eul morceau . Il e l l oit tard ,nous c itions a ieun , e fl rangem en t harafi e z du chemin ,conners de haillons fort fales , pour rafraichiflem en t
on nous commanda de chanter , de marcher en cét
equipage . C’
e il oit le côm en cem en t du triomphe denos viétorieux , i
’
en ton n ay les Litanies de la fain teVierge , [58] le Ven i Crea tor , autres Hymnes de
l’
E gl ife .
Comme nous paflion s la riu iere des H o l l andois , ie
con fe li ay m on compagnon , qui l e voulut difpofer àla mort ; ayant apperceu , en u iron quarante ou cin
quante Iroquois,qui paroiii oien t nous attendre auec
des ba l l ons à la main . On nous dépouilla tous nuds ,à la referue de nos brayers , on nous fit pali er au
trau ers de ces Barbares , rangez en haye . Ils me
don n eren t quelques coups de houffin es fur le dos :
mais comme ie doubl ois le pas , l’
vn de ces bourreaux
m’
arre il a tout court , me prenant par le bras , qu’il
e fl endit , pour me defcharger vn coup d’
vu gros
court ba l l on , qu’ il él eua en l ’air : ie donnay mon
bras à N o ll re S eigneur , croyant qu Il m'
a l l oit cali er
[59] brifer l’
os , entre le coude le poignet : mais
le coup portant fur la ioin ture , i’en fus quitte pour
vn c m eutriliure , qui s’eft euan oüie auec le temps .
E ntrez que nous fu fm es dans la Bourgade , on me
fit monter le premier,fur vn cfchafiau t , planté au
milieu de la place publique , él eué en u iron de cinq
pieds ; mon compagnon y vint bien-toit apres m oy,
portant les marques des bafton n ades qu’ il auoit
receu ës : on voyo it , en tr’
autres , les ve l l iges d’
vn e
fafcheu fe , dou l oureu fe cingl ade , au trauers de l a
poitrine .
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
tasting , extremely fatigued by our j ourney , and cov
ered with very dirty rags ; but for refreshment were
ordered to sing as we walked , thus attired . It was
the beginning of our victors’ triumph . I intoned
the Litany of the blessed Virgin , [58] the Ven i
Crea tor , and other Hymns of the Church .
As we crossed the river of the Dutch , I confessedmy companion , who wished to prepare himself for
death,having caught sight of about forty or fifty
Iroquois who appeared to be waiting for us with
staves in their hands . We were stripped entirely
naked , except our breech -clouts,and were made to
pass through these Barbarians , who were drawn up
in line . They gave me some blows on the back
with their switches ; but as I was quickening my
steps , on e of those executioners stopped me short ,taking me by the arm and stretching it ou t , in
order to give me a blow with a short , thick stick that
he raised aloft . I gave my arm to Our Lord , thinking the man was about to break and [59] shatter the
bone between the elbow and the wrist ; but , the blow
falling on the joint , I cam e O li with a wound which
disappeared in course of time . When we had
entered the Village , I was made to take the lead in
ascending a soafi ol d erected in the middle of the
public p l ace , and raised about five feet from the
ground . My companion joined m c there soon after
ward , bearing the marks of the blows he had received ;and , among others , were seen the traces of a trouble
some and painful lashing across his breast .I felt so firm and calm on this stage , and faced ,
with so serene an eye and mind,those who were
looking at me , that I wondered at myself . N everthe l ess , I felt some alarm at the sight of a certain
L E S R EL A TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
l e me fen tois fi fort , fi paifibl e fur ce theatre ,1 en uifage ois ceux qui me regardoiët , d
’
vn œil
d’
vu e l prit fi ferain , que ie m’
e l l on n ois de moy
me lme . Ie fenty n ean tm oin s quelque frayeur , à la
vene d ’
vn certain B orgn c , qui [60] portoit vn cou
fl eau d ’
vn e main , vn morceau de leur pain de
l ’autre . l e me fouu en ois que le bon Pere Ifaac
Iognes , auoit perdu l’
vu de l es pou l ces fur vn fembl abl e e fcha li au t , ne me fen tan t point pour lors ,dâs la difpofition de luy donner mes doigts , ie m
’ad
dre li aya fon bon Ange , cét homme s ’e l l ant auan cé ,donna le pain , qu
’ il ten oit , à m on compagnon , puis
l e retira fans fa[i]re aucun mal . Vn e p l uye furue
nant , écarta les fpe6tateurs , on nous con duifit fous
vn petit toit , à l’entrée d ’
vne cabane . La on nous
fit chanter , D ieu me mit dans vn c telle foum iflion à
ces Barbares , ie m ’
abandon n ay fi fortement à toutes
fortes de mépris , qu’ il n ’y au oit rien que ie ne fi ll e ,
pouru eu qu’ il me fut commandé , qu ’ il ne fut pas
[61] contre la Loy de Dieu . l e diray icy en pall ant ,ce que i ’
ay remarqué dans vn c lettre particuliere .
Que le Pere , ne rcüll i li an t pas dans toutes ces finge
ries , felon l’ idée des S aunages ; qui , par con fcqucn t ,
e l l ans moins l atisfaits , l’
auroien t p l u l l o l l condamné
à mort ; vn ienne Huron captif parm y ces peuples ,fe pre fen ta pour chanter , pour danier , pour faire
toutes les grimaces , en la place du P ere , qui n’
auoit
iam ais appris ce m e il ier .
Sur le l oir , pourfu it le P ere , on nous conduifit dans
la cabane de ce luy qui m’
auoit pris ; là on me
donna vn plat de leur fagam ité , c’
e ll de la bouillie
faite aue c de l’eau , de la farine de bled d
’
i nde .
Les vieillards s ’eitans a li em bl c z , dans cette cabane ,
L E S RELA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
vn c femme prefen ta vn c bra li c de P orcelaine, [62 ]
pour me faire coupper vn doigt . l e n ’eus plus de
repugnance de donner mes mains ; veu m efm em en t ,
que dans les e fperan ces que i’
auois euës de la vie ,pendant mon voyage , dans les defirs de trauail l er
en fuitte a la paix ; ie croyois toufiours qu ’ il e l l oit
expedient , que l’
en porta li e les marques , qu ’il
m ’en Contait quelque doigt . Si bien que ie ne m ’ad
dre liay plus aux Anges de ces Barbares , pour éu itercette croix : mais bien à Saint Gabriel , pour obtenirla force de la fou li rir gayem en t . Le Borgne quis
’
e il oit approché de n oil re e fchaffau t , pour faire ce
qu ’ il n ’
e x ecu ta pas pour lors , m c prit la main droite ,confideran t m es doigts ; comme l ’anois la pen fée ,que les doigts de cette main , m
’
e fl oien t vn peu plus
n ece li aires , [63 ] que ceux de la gauche : il la prit ,quittant la droite , appellant vn enfant âgé de
quatre à cinq ans , il luy donne fon couteau : m c prit
l ’ index, ou le fecon d doigt de la main gauche , l e
fit couper à cét en fant . l’
offry mon l ang, mes
fou li ran ces , pour la paix : regardant ce petit facrifice
d’
vn œil doux , d’
vu vi l age ferain , d’
vu cœur
ferme : chantant le Vex il la ,ic me fouu ien s , que ie
reïteray deux ou trois fois le couplet , ou la Strophe ,Imp l eta f un t quæ conczn it , D au id fidel i ca rm ine , dicendo
na t ion ibus , r egnau it a l igno D eus .
L’
H ym n e acheué , le doigt coupé , cét homme
me mit au col , vn c partie de la Porcelaine , que
cette femme auoit donnée , de l ’autre il entoura
mon doigt coupé , qu’ il porta à ce l uy qui m
’
auoit pris .
Or comme le l ang fortoit [64] de la playe en abon
dance, cc Borgne y voulut appliquer le feu de fa
pippe à prendre du tabac,pour l ’
e fl an che r : ce qui
RE LA TION OF 1652 53
during my journey , of saving my life , and in my
desire to work afterward in the cause of peace — I
always believed it expedient that I should bear themarks of my experience , and that it should cost me
on e of my fingers . As a result , I no longer appealedto the Angels of these Barbarians , in order to avoidthat cross , bu t rather to Saint Gabriel , that I might
gain strength to su ll er it cheerfully . The One-eyed
man , who had approached our scaffold with a purpose
which he did n ot execute at the time , took my right
hand and examined my fingers ; and , just as I was
thinking that the fingers of that hand were a little
more necessary to me [63 ] than those of the left , he
took the latter and dropped the right . Then calling
a child , from four to five years of age , he gave him
his knife , took the index or forefinge r of my left
hand , and made the child on t it off . I offered my
blood and my sufferings in the cause of peace , regard
ing this little sacrifice with a mild eye , a serene
countenance , and a stout heart ; I sang the Vex il la ,
and I remember that I repeated two or three times
the couplet , or Strophe ,— Imp l eta sun t quæ concin it
D avidfidel i ca rm ine , dicendo na tion ibus , regnavit l ignoD eus .
T he Hymn completed and the finger cut off , that
man hung around my neck a part of the Porcelain
beads which the woman mentioned above had given ;and with the rest he encircled my severed finger
,
and carried it to my captor . N ow,as the blood
flowed [64] from the wound in abundance , the On e
eyed man wished to apply to it the fire of his tobacco
pipe , in order to stanch it — which would have caused
me intense pain . But he was anticipated by others,
who had a glowing coal applied to it by the same
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
m’
auroit caufé vn c grande douleur : mais il fut pre
u enu par d ’autres , qui y firent appliquer vn charbonardent , par le me lme enfant qui l
’
auoit coupé . Lel ang ne l aili an t pas de couler , on me l
’
enue l opa quel
que temps apres , d’
vn e feuille de bled d ’
Inde , ce
fut tout l ’appareil qu ’on y mit , iniques à ce qu’on
m’eut donné la vie . I
’
abbregeray, adj ou l l e le P ere ,ce qui fuit , puis qu
’il me fem bl e qu ’on me l ’arrache
des mains .
Le lendemain on nous mena dans vn c autre Bourgade , où l e deuol t tenir vn c grande A li em bl ée des
notables du païs . Vn e femme m ’o l l a mes fou l iers ,
[65] croyant , peut-eitre , qu’on nous a l l oit executer à
mort . l e fis dôc ce voyage nuds pieds , nud te ll e .
Nous fu fm es e x pofe z trois iours deux nuits , iça
noir e l l le Ven dredy, le Samedy , le D im âche , qui
e l l oit la veille de la N atiuité de la fain éte Vierge , àla rifée , aux brocards , aux in fol en ces des en fan s ,
de tout le monde : nous participafm e s à la pro
me li e,qui fut faite au Fils de Dieu , denaut fa nai l
fan ce . S a turabitur opprobr ij s . Il fera repen d ’
op
probres : c’
e fl oit n o l l re grand mets , depuis le matin
iniques au l oir , dedans la grande place publique , où
nous e ition s e x pofe z . Les vn s me don n oien t des
coups de leurs calumets fur mon doigt coupé : d 'au
tres y app l iquoicn t des cendres bruflan te s : quelques
vn s m ’y don n oien t des chiqu en odes : [66] d’autres y
appl iquoicn t le feu de leur tabac ; d’autres la pierre
chaude de leurs pe tun oirs . E n vn m ot , chacun nous
faifoit quelque mal , felon fa fan tailie . Voila ce que
nous fou li rion s au dehors ; au dedans , nous n’
atten
dions,pour le dernier act e de cette tragedie , que
des tourm en s horribles , épouuen tabl es .
L E S RE L A TIONS D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
La nuit du Ven dredy au S amedy , ils brufleren t
dans le feu de leurs calumets , les deux Index de la
main gauche , de la main droite du panure Mathurin mon compagnon : ce qu ’ il endura auec vn c
patience adm irable , chantant l’
A ue m a r is ft‘
el la dans
l e s fou ffran ce s . Nous fufm es liez fort r igourcufc
ment , pendant ces deux nuits ; on attacha les liens
de nos pieds , de nos mains , fi haut , d’
vn e façon
il rude fi m au li ade , [67] que nous citions à demyfu fpen dus en l
’air , ce qui nous cau foit vn c douleur
tres-grande , fi fen fibl e , qu’
vn bon vieillard voyant
bien qu ’elle e fl oit in fupp0rtabl e , laicha nos liens ,nous fou l agea vn petit .Les Anciens com m anderen t a la ieun e li e , de l e
contenter , l’vu e de ces deux nuits , de nous faire
chanter danier , fans nous cau fer d ’autres tour
mens . C c qui n’
em pefcha pas , qu’en pal l ant aupres
des feux , qui e ll oien t en la cabane , ceux qui les en
touroien t , ne nous appl iqua li en t quelque tifon ardent
fur la chair . l e receus vn c bonne part de cesbruflcures .
Le D imanche l e pali a en con feil s en a li em bl ée s ,
pour fçauoir ce que l’
on feroit de nous . Sur le l oir ,on prononça n o l l re fen ten ce : mais en des termes , que
[68] l e n’
en ten dy point . l e la pris pour vn c fen ten ce
de mort , mon e lprit s’y tronna li difpofé , qu
’ il
fem bl oit que ie voyois la grace toute pre il e , pour me
fou iten ir dans la cruauté des derniers tourm en s :
mais ma fen ten ce cil oit plus douce . l e fus donné à
vn c bonne vieille femme , en la place d ’
vn lien frere ,pris ou tué par ceux de n ofl re party . Ie n ’
auois pas
pour cela la vie faune : car cette femme me pouuoitfaire mourir par tous les tourm en s que la vengeance
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
operation which he bore with admirable patience ,singing the A ve m a r is stel la in his sufi
'
erings . We
were very rigorously bound during these two nights ,the cords around our hands and feet being made fast
at such a height , and in a manner so extremely
uncomfortable, [67] that we were half suspended in
the air ; we suffered in consequence , a pain of such
excruciating severity that a good ol d man , seeing
plainly that it was unbearable , loosened our bonds
and relieved us a little .
On on e of these nights , the E lders ordered the
young people to content themsel ves with making ussing and dance , without causing us further torments .
But that did not prevent those who were around the
fire s in the cabin from touching glowing firebrands to
our flesh as we passed . I received a good part of
these burns .
Sunday was spent in councils and assemblies , in
order to determine what should be done with us .Toward evening , our sentence was pronounced , but
in terms which [68] I did not understand . I took it
for a sentence of death , and my mind was so well
prepared for this that I seemed to see the divine
grace all ready to sustain me in the cruelty of the
last torments . But my sentence was milder : I was
given to a good old woman in place of a brother of
hers , who had been captured or killed by those on
our side . N evertheless , my life was not yet safe ;for that woman could have made me die in all thetorments that could have been suggested by revenge .
But she had pity on me and delivered me from death,
at the season when the Church is wont to honor the
birth of the blessed Virgin . I pray God to reward that
goodness . As soon as I had entered her cabin,she
L E S RE LA TION S D E S ] ÉS UI TE S [VOL. 40
auroit pû fuggerer à fon e l prit : mais elle eut com
paflion de moy , me de l iu ran t de la mort , au temps
que l ’
E gl ife honore la n aili an ce de la fain éte Vierge .
l e prie D ieu de recom pen fer cette bonté . S i toit
que ie fus entré en l a cabane , elle l e mit à chanter
vn c ohan l on des morts : [69] que deux de l es filles
pourfu iu iren t auec elle . I’
e ll ois aupres du feu , pen
dant ces chants lugubres : on me fit a li eoir fur vn ccfpecé de table vn peu él euée : alors l e connu
,que
i’
e fl ois donné pour vn mort , dont ces femmes renon
ue l l oien t le dernier deüil , faifan t refufciter le trefpa li é
en ma perfonn e , fu iuan t leur cou il um e . l e ren con
tray dans cette cabane , vn c A l gon qn in e captine ,adoptée dans cette famille ; où ie me voyois auffi
adopté , comme l e l’
anois vene autrefois , que
i’
en tendois fa l âgu e , cela me réjouit . Ie trouuayaufli vn Huron de mon ancienne con n oili an ce , ce qui
augmenta ma ioye .
A ufii —toil que ie fus fay parent de ma mai l om, on
commença de pen fer mon doigt à l a S auuage : on y
appliqua l e ne fçay quelles [70] racines , ou ecorces
cu ittes , qu’on enu e l oppa d
’
vu chiffon de toil l e , plus
gras qu’
vn torchon de cuifin e . Ce catap l afm e me
dura quinze iou rs , li bien qu’ il s
’
en durcit , en forte
qu ’ il m ’
e itoit fort incommode . On me donna vn c
demie couuerte , pour me fern ir de robe , de liot ;quelque temps apres , on me fit des chaud es , des
fou l iers à leur mode : on me donna aufli vn c vieille
chem ife fort graffe , tout cela au ec tant de bonté
fauuage ,au ec vn c fi grande a li e étion , que ie n
'
ay.
point éprouué plus de cordialité parm y les S aunages ,qui nous font amis . D e plus , on alla payer ma vie
à ce l uy qui m’
auoit pris , par quelques milliers de
P orcelaine .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
Pour mon panure compagnon , il fut mené le
Dimanche en vn c autre Bourgade, bruflé le
Lundy , [7 1] iour de la N atiu ité de la fain te Vierge , qui
m’
auoit de l iuré dés la premiere entrée de fa fe l l e .
A trois iours de l à , on apporta dans la Bourgadeoù i
’
e l l ois , des n ouu e l l es de l’armée
,qui c ll oit allée
au Trois R iu ieres . Ie fus vn all ez long-temps dans
les alarmes de la mort , ne fçachan t pas , fi elles
e l l oien t bonnes ou m auuaife s : citant bien a li euré ,
que ie l erois l ’objet de leurs vengeances,au cas
qu ’elles fu li en [t] m auuaifes .
Mais enfin , il vint vn Capitaine , qui auoit charge
de me faire donner la vie , de me reconduire aux
Trois R iu ieres . Il écheut par vn c prou iden ce toute
particuliere , que cét homme e fl oit de la famille , où
i’
auois c ité donné , frere de celle qui m ’
au oit adopté
pour fon frere . Il dem euroit dans [72 ] vue autre
Bourgade , d ’
où il m ’ennoya deux Hurons , pour m’in
niter de l ’aller voir . Ces bôn es gens dirent des mer
neilles de moy , aux Iroquois ; les a ll uran s , que iettois
[sc. i’
e l l ois] regretté de tous les François , que de
m a vie , de mon retour , depend0it la vie de leurs
compatriotes , qu’on auoit l aili és pour oftages aux
Trois R iu ieres . Ces difcours me firent autant con fi
d erer que i’
auois e fl é m éprifé . Le Capitaine dont ieviens de parler , fut rany me voyant encor en vie , ilme donna vn vieux chapeau , qui me fit pl aifir , pource
qu’ il y auoit douze l ours que i
’
a l [l ]ois n uë te l l e . Il
me promis de me mener aux H ol l andois , pour me
faire habiller : en fu itte , de me ramener aux pays
d es François .
On com m an ça , fur le rapport de ce Capitaine , à
faire des a li em bl écs : [73 ] à tenir des con fe il s pour
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
Virgin,who had delivered me at the beginning of her
festival .Three days thereafter , there was brought to the
Village where I was news of the army that had gone
to T hree R ivers . For a considerable time I was in
fear of death , not knowing whether the news was
good or bad , and being well assured that I would be
the object of their vengeance , in case it were bad .
But at length there came a Captain , who was
commissioned to grant my life , and to conduct me
back to Three R ivers . It happened , by a very
special providence , that this man was a member of
the family to which I had been given , and a brother
of her who had adopted me as her brother . He lived
in [72 ] another Village , whence he sent two Hurons
to invite me to go and see him . These good people
told the Iroquois marvels about me , assuring them
that I was mourned by all the French , and that on
my life and my return depended the lives of their
fellow—countrymen who had been left as hostages at
Three R ivers . These words caused me to receiveas much consideration as I had before met with
indignity . The Captain whom I have just men
tion ed was delighted to see me still alive ; and he
gave me an O l d hat , which was very acceptable tom e , inasmuch as I had been going bareheaded for
twelve days . He promised to conduct me to the
Dutch , in order to have me clothed , and then to take
me back to the country of the French .
Upon this Captain ’ s report,they began to call
assemblies [73 ] and hold councils , for the purpose ofcon cl uding peace with the French . Meanwhile , I wasconducted to fort Orange , occupied by the Dutch ,where I arrived on the twentieth of September .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
arre fter la paix aue c les François . Pendant l e fque l s
ie fus mené au fort d ’
Orange tenu par les Hollan
dois , où i’
arriuay le vin tie fm e de Septembre . Lapremiere m aifon que ie ren con tray, me recent tres
charitabl em eu t : on m ’y pre fen ta dequoy di l uer ,entre autres cho l es , i
’
y m angeay des pommes , don t
l e u’
auois point gou ité depuis quinze ans , ou m’y fit
encor prefeu t d’
vu e chem ife blanche, vu ienne
homme , pris aux Trois R iu ieres , par les Iroquois
rachepté par les H ol l audois , au fque l s il fe ruoit (1 in
terpre te , me vint trouuer : apres quelque entretien ,me dit qu’il l e vien droit coute li er le lendemain qui
e itoit D imanche .
Vne bon n e D ame E co li oife , qui s’eft montrée , dan s
toutes rencontres , [74 ] tres-charitable aux François ,qui auoit fait tout fou pouuoir , pour rachepter le
petit fils de Moufieur P etit , qui c il mort depuis
parm y les Iroquois ; me m en a en l a m aifou , pour
lener l ’appareil d ’
écorce , ou de racines que ces bonnes
Iroquoifes , don t l’
ay parlé , auoien t mis fur m on doit ,l ’ayant veu encor bien malade m ’ ennoya au fort
d’
Orange , pour le faire peu fe r par vu Chirurgien .
Ie ren con tray là le Gouu ern eur de ce fort , à qui leCapitaine Iroquois
, auoit prefen té vu e lettre de Mon
fl eur de L au z on Gouuern eur pour le R oy fur le grand
fleuue de faint Laurens en la n ouue l l e France . Cét
homme me recent fort froidement , u on obll an t que la
lettre , qu’
on luy anoil apportée , me recommandait
tres-auan tageufem eu t . Comme [75] la nuit s’
appro
choit,que ie m ’en allois coucher fur le plancher ,
fans lit , fan s foupper : vu S aunage demanda per
mi ll ion au Gouuerueur , de me mener en vu e m aifon
qui luy e itoit am ie . I’
y fus côduit , i’
y trouuay vn
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
vieillard , qui m e recent auec beaucoup de bienuc il
l an ce . Le François , dont l ’ay fait mention cy-de lius ,dem euroit en cette m aifon : il mit ordre a l a con
fcien ce , pendant trois nuits , que l e dem euray auec
luy chés cét bonne ll e homme , don t ie voudrois
pouuoir recoun oi ll re la courtoifie , par toutes fortes
de feru ices , tan t il me traita hon e il em en t , lors que
i’
c fl ois en vu e ftat le plus m éprifabl e du monde . Ie
ne pouuois pas manquer d’
habits , cét bonne ll e Gentil
homme m ’en pre fen ta vn fort houn e l l e ; a me lme
temps , vu [76] bon Vual on , ne fçachan t rien de cét
offi ce , al l oit que l l er par les m aifou s , pour trouuer
dequoy m’
habil l cr . On me dit encor , que cette
bonne D ame E co li oife , me preparoit la melme cha
rité : mais ie les rem erciay tous , l e ne voulu iam ais
rien accepter , qu’
vn capot , des bas de chau fi es a la
Saunage , auec des fou l iers François , vu e conner
ture , qui me deuoit feruir de lit à mon retour , cetteD ame prit le foin de tout cela aue c tant d ’
addre li e ,
tan t d ’affection , qu ’ elle u’
épargn a aucun a j u ll e
m en t , dont elle l e peut ani l er . Mes hoite s m c pref
fere n t , de prendre des prouifion s pour m on voyage
mais ie me con ten tay, de receuoir quelques pefches ,d
’
vu Marchand de Bruxelles bon Catholique , que iecou fe li ay à mon depart . Il fallut leur promettre à
[77] tous , que ie les retourn erois voir , l’
E ité
prochain : tan t ils me tém oign oieut d’amour de
bien u eil l an ce .
S ortant du quartier des H o l l an dois , ie fus couduya la Bourgade de ce l uy qui m
’
auoit pris . L’
al l au t
vi liter , il m e rendit mon B reuiaire . D e l à nous
allâmes au Bourg , à la cabane où i ’
auois c ité adop
té . l e n ’y fus que deux iours : car on me vint prendre
R E L A TION OF 1652—53
three nights that I spent with him under the roof of
that worthy man ,— whose courtesy I wish I could
acknowledge by any kind of service , so handsomely
did he treat me when I was in the most despicable
condition in the world . I could n ot lack coats , as this
worthy Gentleman presented me a very decent on e ;and , at the same time , a [76] good Walloon , know
ing nothing of this kindness , went to search through
the houses , to find me the means of clothing myself .I was also told that that good Scotch Lady waspreparing to do me the same charity ; but I thanked
them all , an d would not accept anything but a hooded
cloak , and some stockings of the Savage fashion,
with some French shoes , and a blanket that was to
serve me for bed on my return journey . That Ladytook charge of all this , with so much skill and a ffe c
t ion as to include every conceivable provision for my
comfort . My hosts urged me to take some food formy journey ; but I contented myself with some
peaches from a Brussels Merchant , a good Catholic ,whom I confessed at my departure . I had to prom
ise them [77] all to come back and see them the nextSummer , so much affection an d kindness did they
manifest toward me .
Leaving the D utch settlement,I was conducted
to the Village of the m an who had captured me .
Upon going to visit him , he returned to me my
Breviary . Thence we proceeded to the Village and
to the cabin where I had been adopted,where I
remained on ly two days ; for some one came to con
duct me , together with my sister who had given memy life , to the largest of the Iroquois Villages
,for
the purpose of attending the councils and assemblies
in which the question of peace was to be discussed .
L E S RELA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
auec ma fœur , qui m’
auoit donné la vie , pour me
mener en la plus grande des Bourgades Iroquoifes :
afin d ’
afiifter aux con feil s , aux a li em bl ées , où on
deuoit parler de la paix . l e rem arquay qu’on amal
foit par tout des prefeu s , pour me reconduire a
Quebec . Ce u’
e ll o ieu t plus que fc l l iu s , dans lef
quels , on me fai l oit tout le bon accueil polfibl e .
E nfin le lour de S . Michel , [78] il fut arre ité , qu’on
iroit demander , con cl urre la paix auec les François ,au ec leurs Alliez . Cette con cl ufion fut prife , en
la Bourgade , où le premier François , le bon R ené
Goupil , compagnon du P ere Ifaac Iognes , auoit cité
tué par les Iroquois , le melme lour de S . Michel . l e
m’
e il ois toufiours attendu , que cette fefl e , ne l e
pa£feroit pas , fan s quelque chofe de remarquable .
Trois lours apres cette re fo l ution , on m e dit , que
le Capitaine qui m ’
au oit conduit au quartier des H ol
landois,me coudu iroit au pais des François ; non par
eau , à caufe des tem pefl es , qui fon t ordinairement
en cette fai l ou , fur le lac de Champlain , par où il eut
fallu pa li er : mais par vn autre chemin , tres-fafcheux
pour moy ; dau tan t qu’il fa l l oit marcher fept [79] ou
huit iours à pied , dan s ces grandes fore fts , ie
n’
auois ny force , ny jambes pour vn fi grand trauail .
Au bout de ces huit ion rn ées , on trouue vu e riu ierc ,
fur laquelle on vogue en u iron deux ion rs , puis on
rencontre le grand fleuuc de faint Laurens , danslequel l e defcharge cette riu iere ,
a foix an te lieues ,ou enu iron ,
au de li us de l’
Ifle de Montreal , a ll ez
proche du lac nommé l’
On tario .
l e me fouu in s pour lors de S . Iofeph , qui porta
N oitre S eigneur en E gypte , par les defert s d’
A rabie ,
comme on croit , ic le priay de me feru ir de guide ,
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
de fupport , dan s les fatigues de ce voyage . I ’anois
touj ours en grand recours à l a protect ion , dan s tousmes trauaux ; comme au lli à S . Michel , protecteur del
’
E gl ife , de la France . E t il arriua , comme i’
ay
[80] apris depuis , que le quatriém e de Septembre,
iour auquel i'
cn tray pour la premiere fois , e n vu e
Bourgade Iroquo ife , qu’ on chanta à Kebe c le Te
D eum,das vu e petite E gl iie dediée a S . Iofeph ,
en
adtiô de grace de ma de l iuran ce de mon retour
aux Trois R iuiere s ; vn bruit s c itant él eué , fans
qu’
on en ait iam a is pû découurir le premier au theur ,que ie m ’e l tois échappé des mains de l ’
E n n em y. E t
ce melme iou r , ou alla p re fen ter le Sacrifice de la
Me ll e pour le me lme fu j e t , en 1’Ance de S . Iofeph ,
dans vn c E gl ife dediée à Dieu , fous le nom de S .
Michel ; que nous pouuon s appeller l’
A nge de n ofl re
paix , puis qu’elle a cité conclue le iour de fa feite ,
au païs des Iroquois .
E nfin , le troifiém e d’
Oétobre ,ie quittay le dernier
Bourg des [8 1] Iroquois pour retourner à Quebec .
l e ren con tray fur vu e petite coline , vu peu éloignée
du Bourg , les Capitaines , les Anciens du païs , quim
’
attendoien t : au ec les pre fen s qu’ils enuoyoien t ,
comme les contracts de la paix . Ils me firent leur
derniere harangue, m
’
ex citan t à lier fortement n ofl ren ouue l l e alliance . Mon conduct eur s ’e l l ant chargédes prefen s , nous pourfu iu ifm es n ofl re chemin ,fifm cs feulement quatre lieues cette premiere lour
née . Tous ceux qu e nous anions a la rencontre , m e
faifoieu t quelque care li e à leur mode , me prioien t
de moyenner vu e bonn e paix au ec les François .
l e com m en çay, acheuay ce chemin par terre ,au e c des peines iu con ceuabl es . Nous partilm es vn
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
all my labors,as also to that of St . Michael , protector
of the Church and of France ; and it happened , as I
have [80] since learned , that on the fourth of Sep
tember , the day on which I entered au Iroquoi s
Village for the first time , the Te D eum was suug at
Kebec in a little Church dedicated to S t . j oseph .
This was in thanksgiving at my deliverance and my
return to Three R ivers ,— a report having arisen ,though the first author of it could never be discov
ered , that I had escaped from the hands of the
E nemy . On that same day , too , the Sacrifice of the
Mass was offered for the same reason at the Cove of
St . j oseph [S illery] , in a Church dedicated to Godunder the name of St . Michael ,— whom we may callthe Angel of our peace , since that was concluded inthe country of the Iroquois on the day of his festival .
At length , on the third of October , I left behindme the last Village of the [8 1] Iroquois , to return to
Quebec . On a little hill at a short distance from the
Village , I met the Captains and E lders of the coun
try , who were waiting for me with the presents which
they sent in ratification of the peace . They made
me their last harangue , urging me to bind our new
alliance firm ly. My conductor having taken charge
of the presents , we pursued our journey , accomplish
ing only four leagues on that first day . All thosewhom we met bestowed some endearment ou me ,according to their custom , an d begged me to use my
influence in concluding a satisfactory peace with theFrench .
I began and completed this j ourney by land,with
inconceivable fatigues . We started upon a Friday,
the third of October ; [82 ] and we arrived at the firstriver that I mentioned above on Saturday , the elev
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
Vendredy troifiém e d’
Oétobre , [82 ] nous arriuafm es
à la premiere riu iere , dont 1 ay parlé cy-de li us , le
S amedy onzième du mois . Nous marchions e n
compagnie de p l ufieurs Iroquois , qui s’en al l oien t à l a
chali e du Cail or , au lac de l’
On tario : les p l uyes , les
montagnes , les va l ées , les torrens , les ru i li eau x ,
quatre riu ieres a ll ez gro ll es , qu’ il fallut pa li er à
guay , l e mouiller iniques a la ceinture , vu e autre
plus grande , qu’ il fallut trau erfer auec des cayeux
bran fian s , mal liez,les viure s fort courts , du l eul
bled d ’
In de tout n ouu eau , fans pain , fans vin , fans
viande , fans aucune chali e , ces endroits en e l l ans
depeupl és : Toutes ces cho l es , dif—j e , me baftiren t
vu e Croix l i horrible , fi continuelle , qu’il me
fem bl e que ce fut vu miracle perpetu e l , que ie l’aye
pû [8 3 ] porter , dans vu e p ein e fi ex cefliu e , & dans vu e
il grande fo ibl e li e . Ce fut anil i vu e m erue il l e bien
particuliere , que m on Guide l oit toûj ours demeuré
dans la douceur , dans la patience , me voyant li
m auuais pieton . Il me fem bl e que l e participay vnpetit en ce retour
,aux langueurs
,aux defa il l an ccs
du R oy des afll ige z ; comme i’
auois en part en m on
voyage,apres ma prife ,
à l es liens a l es agonies .
Mais voicy qu’au bout de ce trauail de neuf iours ,
parurent trois ieun es hommes , en uoyc z de la part
des Anciens du païs , pour donner anis a m on Cou
duéteur , qu’
vu Capitaine , aqui on auoit fait des pre
fens aux Trois R iu iere s pour ma de l iuran ce , venant
d’
arr iuer au pa1s , rapportoit que les oil ages Iroquois ,l ai li e z [84] dans le fort des François , au oien t c ité mis
aux fers,
qu ’on auoit defia call é la te l l e à quel
ques-vu s d ’
iceu x : ce Capitaine a li eu roit , qu’
il auoit
appris cette n ouu e l l e ,de la bouche d ’
vu S aunage l on
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
amy . E t partant on au erti li oit m on Conducteurl es gens , de prendre garde , s
’ils denoien t s’engager
plus auan t dans mon retour . Ils me dem anderen t,
fi ie vou l ois pali er plus auan t , dans l’
e fl at des affaires .
l e n ’eus point de repartie . Mon Con duéteur me dit
au ec vn grand courage , qu e il ie luy vou l ois donner
ma parole , que ie tafcherois de con feru cr l a vie , qu’ il
l’
ex po l eroit a toutes fortes de dangers , pour m e reme
ner fain faune parm y les François . l e luy donn ay
fort librement , ce pl ufieurs fois : car il me la
demanda toûj ours . La parole donnée [85] accep
tée , nous nous em barquafm es , pourfu iu ifm es n ofl re
chemin . I ’ay fceu depuis , que ce faux bruit e l l oit
fondé , fur ce qu’
on auoit mis les fers aux pieds , a vu
Saunage Algonquin,qui s ’
e ftoit euyuré . Ces alarmes
nous ven oien t de temps en temps , quelques-vu s
pren oien t p l aifir de me les donner , croyan s m’
inti
m ider : mais ces gens-là , n’
e ftoien t pas du nombre
de mes Guides , l e fqu e l s m’ont toufiours traité auec
beaucoup de douceur .
Comme nous commencions d ’approcher de l ’I l l e de
Montreal , m es gens auoien t peur de rencontrer des
Algonquins , cependant ils s’
am u foieu t fi fort a la
chali e , qui es[t] tr es-abondante en ces endroits du
grand fleuu e faint Laurens , que ce retardement mefcm bl oit ennuyeux . N o l l re [86] derniere Croix , fut
le danger de nous perdre , dans les bouillons du faut
de faint Louys , à la vene de l ’habitation de Montreal .l e creu quali trouu er , mon tombeau , dan s ces cou
rans : mais ils ne me firent autre mal , que de lauer
le reite de mes fautes .
E nfin nous aborda fm es heureu fem en t en cette
habitation , le vingtquatriém e d’
Octobre ; les neuf
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
were to involve themselves farther in conducting me
home . They asked me if I wished to go on , as
a li airs then stood , and I had no answer . My Conductor
,with great courage , said to me that if I would
give him my word to try to save his life , he would
expose it to all sorts of dangers for the sake of lead
ing me back , safe and sound , among the French . I
gave it to him very freely , and that many times ; for
he constantly asked me for it . The promise given
[85] an d accepted , we embarked and pursued our
journey . I have since learned that this false rumor
was based on the fact that iron s had been put on the
feet of an Algonquin Savage who had become in toxicated . These alarms came to us from time to time ,and some took pleasure in reporting them to me ,thinking to intimidate me ; but those persons weren ot of the number of my Guides , who always treated
me with much gentleness .
As we began to draw near the Island of Montreal , my people were afraid of meeting with some
Algonquins ; and meanwhile they took such greatpleasure in hunting game being very plenty in
those regions of the great river saint Lawrence— thatthis delay seemed tiresome to me . Our [86] final
C ross was the danger of being swallowed up in the
whirlpools of the saint Louys rapids , within sight ofthe Montreal settlement . I almost thought I would
find my grave in those currents, but they did me no
further harm than to wash away the rest of my sins .At last , we landed safely at that settlement on
the twenty-fourth of October,— nine weeks having
passed , in honor of St . Michael and all the holyAngels , since the beginning of my captivity . We
left Montreal ou the twenty—fifth ,toward evening
,
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
fem aiu es accomplies de ma captiu ité , en l’honneur
de S . Michel , de tous les faints Anges . N ous
en partifm e s le vingt-cin quie fm e fur le l oir , arri
uafm es aux Trois R iu ieres , le vingt-huitième où nous
dem eurafm es iniques au troifiefm e de N ouem bre .
Le cin qu ie l m e , nous m ifm e s pied à terre à Quebec ;Le fix ièm e
, nos Iroquois mes Conducteurs , [87] firentleurs prefen s pour la paix , aufque l s ou répondit par
d ’autres pre fen s , aiu li vn D imanche au l oir , quatre
vingt vn iour[s] apres ma prife , c’
e fl à dire neuf foisneuf iours accomplis , le grand affaire de la paix tant
defirée ,fut terminé . Les S aints Anges faifan s voir
par ce nombre de neuf , qui leurv'
cft dediè , la part
qu ’ils pren oien t en ce faint ouurage , conduit tout
d’
vn e autre façon , que les aff aires des S aunages , qu i
font extremement longs en leurs a li em bl ées , en
leurs procedc z . l e n ’ay c ité qu’
vu mois dan s le pais
des Iroquois . l’
y entray le quatrième S eptembre .
l’
en forty le troifièm e d’
Oëtobre . E t dan s ce peu de
temps,i
’
ay communiqué auec les H ol l andois : i’
ay
veu le fort d ’
Orange : i’
ay pali é trois fois dans les
quatre Bourgades des Iroquois [88] A n n iehrôn on s
le reit e du temps de ma captiu ité , a e fl é employé ,dans mon allée
, dan s m on retour . l e fus conduypar la R iu iere des Iroquois , par le Lac de Champlain
,ne fis en fuite que deux iourn ées de chemin
par terre . E t ie l u is rencun par vu e autre route : fi
bien que i’
ay pa li é par les deux chemins qu e
tiennent leurs armées , leurs guerriers , quand ils
nous viennent chercher . Voila à peu pres , ce quel
’
obeïfian ce a exigé de moy , fur mon voyage .
L E S RE L A TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
CHAPITRE V .
D E L A PAIX FAIT E A U E C L E S IR OQU O IS .
NFIN nous auon s la paix , p l eût à Dieu que cesparoles , fu ll eu t anil i veritables dans la bouche
des François : qu’
elles fon t [89] douces
agreabl es aux Habitans de la N ouue l l e France . Ouy,
mais dira que l qu’
vn , les Iroquois , font des perfides ?
ils ne font la paix , que pour trahirplus auan tageu fe
ment dans vu e n ouue l l e guerre ? le pali é nous e ll vn
grand prouoitique du futur ? nous auon s defia en la
paix auec eux , ils l'
ont violée . l e con fe fi e que
nous auon s en la paix au ec eux : mais ie ne fçay fi
iam ais ils l’ont euë au ec nous : car a vray dire , c
’
c
fl oit nous qui les portions à la paix , nous les preflion s ,par prefen s , par de longs con fe il s . Ils auoien t
bien quelque inclination de s ’allier des François
mais ils au oien t horreur des S aunages , notamment
des A lgôqu iu s . Ceux qui auoien t les yeux ouucrts ,
con n oili oien t bien que cette paix n’
e ftoit pas dan s la
parfaite idée des Saunages . [90] Mais , quoy qu’ il en
l oit du futur , duquel ie ne voudrois pas répondre ,ny en l ’vn e ny en l ’autre France : fi pouuon s nous
dire auec verité , que ce font prefen tcm en t les Iro
quois , qui on t fait la paix . Ou pl u itoit difon s que
c ’e l l D ieu , car ce coup e l l fi foudain , ce changement
fi im preueu ; ces difpofition s , dans des e l prits Bar
bares,fi furpren an tes : qu
’ il faut con fe li er , qu’
vn
genie plus re l euè que l’humain , a conduit cèt ouurage .
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
CHAPTE R V .
OF T H E PE ACE MADE W IT H T H E IR OQU O IS .
T last we have peace . Would to God that these
words were as true in the m on ths of the
French as they are [89] sweet and agreeable to
t he Inhabitants of New France ! Ye s ,” some one
will say , but the Iroquois are treacherous , making
peace only in order to betray us to better advantage
in a fresh war . The past is very ominous to us ofthe future : we have already had peace with them
and they have violated it . I admit that we have
had peace with them , but am uncerta in whether they
have ever had it with us ; for , to tell the truth , it
was we who induced them to make peace , urging
them with presents and in l ong councils . They had ,indeed , some inclination to ally themselves with the
French , but held the Savages , and especially the
Algonquins , in abhorrence . Those who had their
eyes open recognized clearly that that peace did not
e ntirely suit the Savages ’ notions . [90] But , how
ever it may be in the future,— which I would n ot
like to answer for , either as to Old France or as to
new ,— yet we can say with truth that , in the present
instance , it is the Iroquois that have made peace .
Or , rather , let us say that it is God ; for this stroke
is so sudden , this change so unexpected , these
t endencies in Barbarian minds so surprising,that
,it
must be admitted , a genius more exalted than that ofman has guided this work . In the evening there
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
Le l oir , il n ’y au oit rien de li hideux,pour a in fi dire ,
de il de ll ait , que le vi l age de ce panure pays :
le lendemain , il n’y a rien de fi guay , de fi ioyeux
que la face de tous les Habitans : on l e tu é , on l e
m afi acre , ou faccage , on brune , vu Me [r]credy par
exemple , le Icudy on l e fait des pre fen s , on l e
vifite les vu s les autres , [9 1] comme font les amis .
Si les Iroquois on t quelque de li e in , Dieu a anil i les
liens . l e m’
a li eure qu ’on auoüera , que ce que [ie]vay dire , ne s
’eit point fait par vn pur rencontre .
Le iour de la V ifitation de la fain te Vierge , leCapitaine A on tarifaty tan t regre tè des Iroquois , ayan t
c ité pris de nos S aunages , in l l ruit par nos P eres ,fut baptifè , ce me lme iour , ayant cité execute a
mort , il monta au Ciel . l e n e doute point qu ’il n ’ait
remercié la fain te Vierge de l es malheurs de fou
bon-heur , qu ’ il n ’ait prié D ieu pour l e s Compa
triotes .
Les habitans de Montreal , comme nous auon s
remarqué cy—deli us , ayans fait vn vœu l ol cn n c l , de
ce l ebrer publiquement la fe ll e de la Prefen tation de
cette Mere des boutez,les Iroquois [92 ] des Nations
plus hautes,les re cherchcreu t de paix .
Ce fut le lour de l ’
A li om ption de cette R eine des
Anges des hommes,que les Hurons prirent dans
l’
I ll e de Montreal, cét autre fameux Capitaine
Iroquois , qui fut cau fe que les A n n iehron n ous
dem an deren t n ofl re alliance , comme nous verronsbien-toit .
Le François qui accom pagn oit le P . Pou cet en l a
prife ,ayant cité bru ll è au païs des Iroquois , ils dôn e
rent la vie au Pere,au temps que l
’
E gl ife honore la
N atiu ité de la fain te Vierge , il trauail l a en fuite , .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
H efficacement à la paix, ou p l u ito l l la fa in te Vierge ,
les faints Anges , que le iour de S . Michel , il futarreftè dans vn Con feil public des vieillards du païs ,qu ’on rem en eroit le Pere à Quebec , qu ’on l ieroit
fortement [93 ] la paix au ec les François .
Le me lme lour de la n aili an ce de la fain te Vierge ,pendant que les Iroquois A n n iehron n on s con cl uoien t
la paix en leur païs , ou faifoit vn c procefli on gene
rale à Quebec ; pour gagner le cœur du fils , par
l’
en trem ife de la mere . On y fit marcher quatre cens
m on iqu etaîres bien armez , qui faifan s leur defcharge
de temps en temps bien a propos , don n eren t de
l’
èpouuâte aux Iroquois , qui e itoiët de fcendu s pour
parler de la paix, ce qui leur fit inger que cette paix
leur e fl oit d ’autant plus n ece ll aire , qu’ ils remar
quoieu t d’
addre li e en nos François , à manier les
armes , dont ils ven oien t d’
ex perim cn ter quelques
effets , aux Trois R iuieres .
Or dites—m oy maintenant , fi le hazard , ou la Proni
dence on t trauail l é [94] dans ces rencontres ? li l a
deuotion des habitans de la n ouu e l l e France , la
confiance qu ’ ils ont euë enu ers l’
E pou fe du grand S .
Iofeph ,Patron de toutes ces n ouu e l l es E gl il e s , n
’
a
pas cité bien recom peu fè ? pa ll on s outre .
Les Iroquois qui nous faifoien t la guerre e l l oien tdiu ife z en cinq N ations , dont volcy les noms en
langue Huronne .
Les A n n iehron n on s , dont le pais s’appelle A n ié .
Les On n e ihron n on s , dont le principal Bourg l e
nomme On n e ion t .
Les On n on taëron n on s , dont le païs la principale
Bourgade l e nomme On n on taé .
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
in the cause of peace— or , rather , the blessed Virgin
and the holy Angels did this — that on St . Michael ’scl ay it was decreed , in a public Council of the elders
of the country , to conduct the Father back to Que
bec , and conclude a firm [93 ] peace with the French .
On the same day , that of the birth of the blessed
Virgin,while the A n n iehronn on Iroquois were con
cluding peace in their country , a general procession
was celebrated at Quebec for the purpose of winning
the heart of the son through the mediation of the
mother . Four hundred musketeers , well armed ,were made to join in this procession ; and as theydischarged their pieces from time to time , at fittingmoments , they filled with alarm the Iroquois who
had come down to treat of peace ; and who were led
to conclude , from this exhibition , that peace was the
more necessary for them , as they remarked our
Frenchmen ’ s address in handling their arms , some
e liects of which they had just experienced at Three
R ivers .
T ell me , now , whether it was chance or P rovi
dence that was at work [94] in these emergencies ,and whether the devotion of the people of new
France , and the trust which they reposed in the
Spouse of the great St . j oseph , Patron of all thesenew Churches , has not been well rewarded . Let uscontinue .
T he Iroquois who made war upon us were divided
into five N ations , whose names , in the Huron language , are as follows :T he A n n iehron n on s , whose country is ca lled
A n ié .
T he Onn e ihron n on s , whose principal Village isnamed On n e ion t .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VO L . 40
L e s S on n on touaheron n on s du pa1s nommé S on n on
thonan .
Les On ion enhron n ou s , dont le Bourg s’
appelle
On n eïotè .
[95] Qui a porté toutes ces N ations , à prendre desfen tim eu s de paix , in dependem m en t les vues des
autres ? N ous au ou s fceu de bonne part , que les
S on n on touahe ronn on s , qui font la plus gra'
nde nation
Iroquoife , la plus peuplée, pen foien t a la paix dès
le P rintemps : auec de li e in d ’y faire ioin dre les
On ioenhron n on s leurs plus proches voifin s .
N ous auou s veu au Chapitre fecond , comme les
On n on taëron on s , en fu itte les Oun e j ohron n on s ,font venus la demander aux François de Montreal .Il ne re il oit plus que le feu l Iroquois A nn iehron
n on , lequel en flé de l e s vict oires , vou l oit perfeuerer
dans les defirs de la guerre : mais il a donné les
mains , anil i bien , que les autres . Toutes ces pen fèes
de paix,d ’alliance
,font [96] elles entrées , quali à
me lme temps , dan s les e fprits farouches , in fol en s
de ces Nations , fans vu e prouiden ce toute particu
l iere ? D eus nobis hæc otia fecit . D iion s p l uto it . D i
gitas D ei e/t hic . Ce coup , c il vn coup de la pu ili an ce
du grand D ieu . Ce qui nous cou fo l e fortement dans
cette fain te prou iden ce e l l , que fi qu e l qu’
vn e de ces
Nations ven oit a l e dem en t ir , il c il bien croyable que
les autres,nous ayans recherchés , chacune en leur
particulier,ne rom peroien t pas l i facilement auec
nous , mais venons au detail .
Les On n on taeron n on s , s ’
e ll an s prefen té au nombre
de foix an te à Montreal , pour fonder fi les cœur desFrançois auoit quelque difpofition a la paix , le Gou
u crn eur de la place , l e deflian s deux prudemment ,
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
leur dit , que leurs [97] defloyau te z pa li ées , ren doi [en ]t
leurs propofition s fort fu fpedtes , que 5 Ils auo ien t
quelque amour pour n ofl re alliance , qu’ il fal l oit le
témoigner à Mon fieur de L au fou G0uuern eur de toutle païs , qui e ll oit à Quebec . Le Capitaine répondit ,qu ’ il fal l oit bien diftinguer , entre Nation Nation ,que les On n on taërou n on s n
’
eftoien t pas infide l es ,comme les Iroquois A n n iehron n on s , qui recu ifcn t leur
fic l , l ’amertume de leur cœur , au milieu de leur
poitrine , quand leur langue profere quelques bonnes
paroles . Que pour luy , à qui toute la Nation au oit
fait entendre l es intentions , qu’ il parl oit de toutes l es
parties de fou corps , depuis l es plus petits orteils ,iniques au fom m et de la te l l e ; qu ’ il n ’y auoit rien
dans l on cœur , ny dans le re fl e [98] de l es membres ,qui dem en tit ce qui e ll oit forty de l a bouche . Qu ’il
iroit voir le grand On on tio , le Gouu ern eur des
François , qu ’ il luy feroit l es pre fen s , dans
l efque l s e itoien t renfermez , les de lirs de toute l a
Nation .
E n effet , il de fceudit de Montreal iniques a Que
bec,faifan t foix an te lieues fur le grand fleuu e . La
premiere a li em b l ée l e tint en l ’
Ifle d’
Orl ean s , en la
Bourgade des Hurons , a deux lieues de Quebec . Ce
Capitaine fit étaler l e s prefen s , qui feru en t parm ytous ces peuples Barbares , comme parm y nous , l es
efcr its , les Contrats . Tout le monde citant aflis
il l e leua , in u oquan t prem ierem en t le Soleil , comme
vu témoin fidele,de la fin ceritè de l es pen fée s ,
comme vu flambeau,qui ban n i ll oit la nuit , les
tenebres [99] de fou cœur : pour donner vn iour
veritable à l es paroles .
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
in any wise inclined to peace , the Governor of the
place,prudently distrusting them , told them that
their [97] past acts of treachery rendered their
proposals highly suspicious , and that , if they had
any desire for an alliance with us , they must make it
evident to Monsieur de Lauson , Governor of the
whole country , who was at Quebec . The Captain
replied that a careful distinction must be made be
tween N ation and Nation ; that the On n on taëroun on s
were not faithless , like the A n n iehronn on Iroquois ,who cherish , deep in their breast , their rancor and
bitterness of heart , while their tongues are uttering
fair words . He said that , as for him , whom the
whole Nation had acquainted with its sentiments , he
spoke with every part of his body , from his little
toes up to the top of his head , and that there was
nothing in his heart , or in any of his other [98]members , that gave the lie to what had come ou t of
his mouth ; and that he would go and see the great
On on tio , Governor of the French , and would offer
him his presents , in which were enclosed the wishes
of his entire Nation .
In fact he did go from Montreal down to Quebec ,voyaging sixty leagues upon the great river . The
first assembly was held on the Island of Orleans , in
the Village of the Hurons , two leagues distant from
Quebec . This Captain displayed his presents ,which , among all these Barbarous tribes , have the
same use that writings and Contracts have with us .When every on e was seated , he arose , and first invoked the S un as a faithful witness of the sincerity
of his intentions , and as a torch that banished the
night an d the darkness [99] from his heart , to l e t in
a veritable daylight upon his words .
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UITES [VOL . 40
Ces prefen s con fiil oien t en ca il ors , en porcelaine,
chacun d ’eux au oit fou n om . faifoit voir le defir
de ce l uy qui parl oit , de ceux qui l ’
auoien t delegué .
Le premier , l e donn 01t pour e liuyer les larmes ,
qu’on ie tte ordinairement
,à la n ou [u ]e l l e des branes
guerriers m a fi acre z dans les combats .
Le fecon d , deuo it feru ir d’
vu brennage agreable ,contre ce qui pourroit re l l er d
’
am ertum e , dans le
cœur des François , pour la mort de leurs gen s .
Le troifiém e , deuo l t fournir vn c écorce , ou vu e
couu e rture ,pour mettre fur les morts , de peur
qu e leur regard , ne ren ouu e l lât les anciennes que
relles .
[ 100] Le quatrième , e l toit pour les enterrer , pourfouler bien fort
,la terre deli us leurs fo l i es : afin
que iam ais rien ne fortit de leurs tombeaux qui pût
a ttril l er leurs parens , canier dan s leurs efprits ,
quelque émotion de vengeance .
Le cinquième, deuoit l eru ir d
’
enu e l oppe , pour fi
bien empaqueter les armes , qu'
on n ’y touchait plus
d’
ore fn auau t .
Le fix iém e ,pour nettoyer la riu iere , fouillée de
tan t de l ang.
Le dernier,pour exhorter les Hurons d’
agrcer ce
qu’
On on tio ,grand Capitaine des François , deuoit
conclure touchant la paix .
Comme il l e faut accou ftum e r , aux cou il um es ,
aux façons de faire , des peuples qu’on veut gagner ,
quand elles ne font pas éloignées de la raifon : Mon
fieur le [ 10 1] Gouucrn eur , rendit parole pour parole ,
pre fen s pour pre fen s .
Le premier fut donné , pour faire tomber la hached
’armes,des mains de l
’
Iroquois Onn on taëroun on .
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
Le fecon d , pour brifer la chaudiere , où il faifoit
cuire les hommes , qu’ il pren oit en guerre .
Le troifièm e ,pour leur faire quitter les couteaux ,
qui feruoien t à cette boucherie .
Le quatrième , pour leur faire mettre bas leursa rcs , leurs fleches , autres armes .
Le cinquième , pour effacer les peintures , les
couleurs rouges , dont ils l e barbouillent le vi l age ,
quand ils vont en guerre .
Le fix iém e , pour cacher il bien les canots , ou les
batteaux qu ’ils font pour les combats , qu’ils ne
pu i li en t lamais plus les re trouu er .
[ 102 ] Ces Con traéts pa li e z : tout le monde s’en
réj oüit . Ces A m bafladeurs , ou ces D e l egu e z pour
la paix, em portercn t leurs Capots , leurs couuertures ,
leurs chaudieres , autres fem bl abl es denrées , en
quoy, a m on anis , con fil toien t leurs prefen s . Ils
promirent que dan s quelque temps , ils rapporteroien t
d es n ouu e l l e s , de la ioye vn iu erfe l l e de toute leur
Nation . Venons maintenant aux Iroquois Anniehron n on s , les plus orgueilleux , les plus fuperbes ,de toutes ces Contrées . Ce fout eux , qui ont m a l
facrè le P . Ifaac Iognes , bru ll e z le P . Iean de Bre
heuf , le P . Gabriel L a l l em an t , p l u lieurs autres
François .
Ce s T hrafon s , ayans pris re fol u tion de furprcn dre ,
de mettre à feu,
à l ang , le Bourg des Trois
R iu iere s , comme nous auou s veu [ 103 ] cy-de li us :
t rouuan s plus de refil l an ce qu ’ils n’
auoien t pen fè ,
furent changez quali en vu moment . D ix ou douze
d’
en tr’
eu x,parurent au e c vu Guidon blanc , fur l e
grand fleuu e , s’
approchan s du fort , orians , qu’
ils
vou l oien t parlementer , traiter de paix : qu’
on
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
The second,to break the kettle in which he cooked
the men whom he captured in war .
The third,to make them throw down the knives
used in this butchery .
The fourth , to cause them to lay down their bows
a nd arrows and other arms .
The fifth , to wash O li the paint and the red dyes
with which they besmear their faces when they go
t o war .
The sixth , to hide so carefully the canoes or boats
that they make for use in war , that they shall never
b e able to find them again .
[ 102 ] These Agreements exchanged , everybodyrejoiced over the event ; and the peace Ambassadors ,o r D elegates , carried away their Cloaks , their blan
kets , their kettles , an d other like commodities ,— iu
which , I believe , their presents consisted . They
promised that they would , in a short time , bringback news of the universal j oy of their entire Nation .
Let us come now to the A n n iehron n on Iroquois , the
proudest and most arrogant people of all these
R egions . It was they who murdered Father Isaac
j ogues , and burned Father j ean de B rebeu f , FatherGabriel L al l em an t , and several other Frenchmen .
These T hrasos , after resolving to surprise and put
t o fire and sword the Village of T hree R ivers , as we
have seen [ 103 ] above , and finding more resistance
than they had expected , were changed almost in a
moment . Ten or twelve of their number appearedo n the great river with a white Flag
,approaching the
fort , and calling on t that they wished to parley and
to treat of peace , and that some on e should be sent
to them for the purpose of hearing what they had tosay. T he one who presented himself , on the part
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
leur en u oya it qu e l qn’
vn pour les écouter . C e l uy
qui l e pre fen ta ,de la part des François , commença
par des in u eétiu es , leur reprochant leurs fourbes ,leurs perfidies . Tu es vn ienne homme , répondit le
Capitaine de ces Iroquois,nous au ou s demandé quel
qu’
vu qui nous écoutait , n on pas vu ienne homme
pour nous venir parler . Vas t ’en voir tes vieillards,
ceux qui determ in en t de vos affaires , prend langue
d ’eux , puis tu parleras . Ie fçay, repart le Fran
çois , leurs fen tim eu s : ils [ 104] croyen t tous , que vous
e l l es des trompeurs , qui ne fçau ez que c’e l l de tenir
vo l tre parole . Va les con fu l ter , dis leur , que nous
auous de bonnes pen fées : que n ofl re cœur n ’a plus
de venin . Le François remonta au fort ; ou s’
a li em
bla en la m aifon de Ville , ou creu t , que ces
Barbares , u’
auoien t aucune volonté de la paix : mais
qu ’ ils cherchoien t les occafiou s de nous furprcndre .
Cèt homme les retourne voir . l e vous auois bien dit ,leur fit -il , que i
’
auois con n oiflan ccs des pe n fées de
nos Anciens . Ils vou s prennent tous pour des fourbes ,pour des gens aue c l e fqu e l s il ne faut point parler ,
que par la bouche de nos canons . Si vous au ie z des
pen fèes de paix , vous parleriez de n ou s rendre vu de
n os P eres , vn François , que vos gens ont pris de
puis [ 105] peu , ès enu iron s de Quebec . Ce Capitaine
fut furpris a cette n ouue l l e , n’ayant point de con
n oi li auce de cette prife . Ie n ’ay pas fceu , repart-il
qu ’on ait pris des François : mais ie m ’en vay pre
l entement enuoyer deux canots en di l igëcc en n ofl re
païs ; afin d’
em pefcher qu’
on ne leur fa li e aucun mal,
ie te donne parole , que s’ ils font encor viuan s , tu
les verras bien -toit dâs vos habitations .
Cét homme parl oit d’
vu tel accent , que l on cœur
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
parut s ’accorder auec l es paroles . Mais vu rencontre
arriua fur ces entrefaites , qui fit inger, que ce petit
rayon de paix , qui com m eu coit à poindre , s’
al l oit
éteindre dès l a premiere n ai li an ce . N os François
s’
im agin oien t , que ces Barbares , ayans appris , que
nos Hurons ten oien t qu elques-vu s de leurs gen s
prifon n icrs , [ 106] dem andoien t la paix pour leur
fauu er la vie : par ie ne fçay quel malheur , difon s
p l u ito l l par vn c fecre tte prou iden ce , ces prifon
niers tom beren t en leurs mains , en la façon que ie
vay dire .
Vn Capita ine Huron allant en guerre , fut au erty
par les François qui font à Montreal , qu ’ il y auoit
des ennemis dedans leur I lle ; ce Capitaine , comme
nous auou s dcfia remarqué , les cherche , les trouu e a
la pi ll e , les pourfu it , les attaque , les ayant de fiaits ,il prit leur Capitaine , quatre des principaux de l es
gens ; or comme il ne fçauoit pas , qu’ il y eut vu e
a rmée d ’
Iroquois aux Trois R iuiere s , qu ’ il fa l l oit
pali er par l à , pour de fcendre a Quebec : où il vou
loit mener l es prifon n icrs , il alla iu ftem en t donner
dans les [ 107] panneaux , comme on dit . Car lors
qu’ il y pen foit le moins , qu ’ il de fcendoit douce
ment fur le grâd fleuu e ; s’
en treten an t de la paix ,de la guerre , au ec l e s prifon n icrs , il apperceu t
d e loin , l’armée Iroquoife : il l e vid , quali en vu
moment,de victorieux , vaincu : de triomphant ,
captif . Vn e partie de l es gens , tournant le cap deleurs petits batteaux vers la terre , l e fauu ët au pl u
fl oit vers les bois : les autres , ne vou l au s pas reculer ,furent fur le point de m afiacrer leurs cinq captifs ,pour mourir plus gl orieu l em ët , felon les idées du
païs dans le l ang de leurs ennemis . Mais D ieu retint
R E LA TION OF 1652 53
seemed to be in accord with his words . Meanwhile ,however
,au incident took place which made us think
this little ray of peace that was beginning to dawn
was going to be extinguished at its very birth . Our
French people imagined that those Barbarians , upon
learning that our Hurons were holding some of their
men as prisoners , [ 106] were asking for peace in
order to save the lives of the latter ; and , by some
misfortune or other— or let us rather say , by an
inscrutable providence — these prisoners fell into
their hands in the manner I am about to describe .
A Huron Captain , upon starting out to war , waswarned by the French at Montreal that there weresome enemies within the confin e s of their Island .
This Captain , as we have already noted , hunted forthem , and traced , pursued , and attacked them ; and
after defeating them , he captured their Capta in and
four of his principal followers . N ow,as he did not
know that there was an army of Iroquois at Three
R ivers , and as he was obliged to pass by that place
in going down to Quebec , whither he wished to con
duct his prisoners , he fell right into the [ 107] trap ,as the saying is . For , when he was least expecting
such a thing , and was quietly proceeding down the
great river , talking with his prisoners about peaceand war , he caught sight of the Iroquois army from
a distance , and saw himself changed , almost in a
moment , from victor to vanquished , and from being
triumphant to being himself a captive . Part of his
men , turning the prows of their little boats toward
the land , ran away as fast as they could toward the
woods ; the others , not wishing to retreat , were on
the point of butchering their five prisoners,— that
they might die the more gloriously,according to the
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
leur bras , defia l eué pour ramener le coup . Il leur
donna des pen fèes de vie , de paix , à la vene de la
mort , dan s les apparences de la continuation d’
vn e
cruelle guerre . [ 108] A aoueatè Capitaine des H u
rons , s’
addre li an t au Capitaine Iroquois fon captif ,nommé A ronhiciarha , luy dit : Mon neuen , (c
’e l l vn
terme d ’amitié vfitè parm y ces peuples) ta vie e it
entre mes mains , ie te peux tuer , me fauucr anili
bien que les autres, ou me ie tter au milieu de tes
gens , pour en m afi acrer autant qu’
il me feroit
po lfibl e : mais ton l ang , ce l uy de tes gens , ne nous
re tireroit pas des malheurs , où vos armes nous ont
iette z . Nous au ou s parlé d ’alliance , puis que la paix
e ft plus pre cieu fe que ma vie , i’
aim e mieux la rif
quer , dans le de li e in de procurer vn fi grand bien àmes petits n eu eu x , que de venger par l
’
e ffufion de ton
l ang,la mort de mes A u ce ll res . Au moins mour
ray-ie honorablement , fi on me tue, apres t’
auoir
donné la vie . [ 109] E t toy , fi tu me l aili e m’
a liacrcr
par tes parens , le pouuan t em pefcher , tu pa ll eras le
reite de tes iours , dans le desh0n n eur ; tu feras tenu
pour vn laiche , d’
auoir foufiert qu ’on mit à mort ,ce l uy qui ven oit de te donner la vie . Le CapitaineIroquois repartit : Mon oncle , tes pcn fées font droites .
Il c il vray, que tu me peux c iter la vie : mais donne
la moy,pour te la con feruer . La gloire que i ’
ay
acquife à ma Nation , par mes victoires , ne me rendpas fi peu côfiderabl e , dâs l
’
e fprit de mes Compatri
otes,que ie ne pu ill e t
’
a li curer de la vie , toy tes
gens . Si les miens te veulent attaquer , mon corps
te feru ira de bouclier . Ie fou ll riro is pl u il oil , qu’
ils
me brûl a li en t a petit feu , que de m e rendre m épri
fable iniques à ce point , de ne pas honorer vo l tre
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
bien -fait , [ I 10] mon retour , par vo l tre de l iuran ce .
Les Onn on taeronn on s , qui portoien t les pre fen s ,don t nous venons de parler , à On n on tio , c
’
e it a dire
à Mon fieur le Gouuern eur , pour difpofer fon e l prit à
la paix , s’
eitans embarquez à Montreal , au ec ces deuxCapita ines vi6torieux , vaincu , voyan s la medaille
tournée , la face des affaires bien changée , par le
rencontre de cette armée Iroquoife , fe mirent du
co l l é des Hurons , prote iterët , tout haut , que fi on
attaquoit leurs conducteurs , car c’
e ftoien t les Hurons
qui les anc ient embarqués , qu’ ils e x poferoien t leur
vi e pour eux . A ronhiciarha Capitaine Iroquois leur
dit , ne craign és point . l e vous donne parole , que
nous ferons receu s fauorabl em en t . Ils [ I 1 1] auoien t
fait alte pendant ce difcours . Ils pou li en t leurs
canots vers l ’A rm ée qui les ayant reconnus ennoic
dix-huit grands canots au denaut deux . Ils l e virent
iuueftis de tous co ll és en vu moment , ces canots
ven oicn t tous aue c vn e l prit de paix : iniques la , que
ce l uy qui les Com m andoit , ayant parlé en peu de mots
au Capitaine Iroquois captif , fon compatriote , eunoia
du monde à terre,pour chercher les Hurons fuyards ,
leur donner afluran ce de la vie , de la paix .
A aoueatè Capitaine Huron , l e voyät au milieu de fes
E n n em 1s , dont les témoignages de bienue il l an cc , luy
paroi li oicn t des marques de trahifon leurs carel l es ,des indices de l a mort , ou p l u il oil de mille morts ,auan t que de mourir : l e l eue , pour f ’
an im er aux
fou ffran ces , [ 1 12 ] chante d’
vu ton tout martial , l esanciens proüe li es ; Il rapporte le nombre d
’
Iroquois
qu ’ il a tués,les cruautés qu’il a exercé fur eux ,
celles dont il e fpere , que l es n eueux vengeront
quelque iour , les tourm en s qu ’ il va fou ll rir .
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
than to render me contemptible to the extent of not
honoring your benefaction [ 1 10] and my return , by
setting you free .
T he On n on taeron n on s who were bearing the pres
ents which we have just mentioned , to Onn on tio ,
that is , to Monsieur the Governor ,— in order to
incline his heart to peace , after embarking at Montreal with these two Captains , victor and vanquished ,and seeing the tables turned and the aspect of affairs
reversed by meeting with this Iroquois army,put
themselves on the side of the Hurons , and stoutly
maintained that , if any on e attacked their escort,
for it was the Hurons who had taken them into theirboats ,— they would risk their own lives for them .
A ronhiciarha , the Iroquois Captain , said to them
Fear n ot ; I give you my word that we shall be
favorably received . They [ I 1 I ] had halted during
this conversation , after which they urged their canoes
toward the Army , which , after reconnoitering them ,
sent eighteen large canoes to meet them . They saw
themselves surrounded on all sides in a very shorttime ; bu t these can ocs all came with peaceful intent , - so entirely so , that their commander , after
holding a brief interview with the captive Iroquois
Captain , his countryman , sen t some men ashore to look
for the runaway Hurons and give them assurance oflife and peace . S eeing himself in the midst of hisE nemies , whose testimonials of good will seemed to
him signs of treachery , an d their caresses signs of
his death ,— or , rather , of a thousand deaths before
the final one , - A aoueatè , the Huron Captain , arose
and , in order to give himself courage for su li cring,
[ 1 12 ] sang , in a martial ton e ,his former deeds of
prowess . He related the number of Iroquois he had
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
Tu n ’es ny captif , ny en danger de mort , luy répon
dent les Iroquois , tu es au milieu de tes freres ,tu fçauras que le François , le Huron l
’
Iroquois ,
quitte la ohanl on de guerre , entonne vu e chan fon
de paix , qui commence au iourd’
huy pour ne finir
iam ais .
Vous e l l es des perfides , repart le Capitaine Huron ,vo l tre cœur e it enu en im è , vo ltre e l prit e ll rem pl y de
fourbes , fi vous parlés de paix , ce n’eft que pour vier
d’
vn e [ 1 13 ] trahifon plus fun e ite , pour nous
pour les François . l e ne con n oy que trop vos ru l es .
Contentés vous maintenant , de manger la te l l e des
Hurons : mais fçachés que vous ne ten és pas encor
les autres m embres . Mes gens ont encor des pieds ,des mains ; des iambes des bras : cela dit , il tend
le 001 pour eitre coupé : mais voyant que pcrfoun e ne
m ettoit la main au cou l l eau , bru lles moy donc , leur
dit—il , n’
epargn ès point vos fuppl ice s : anil i bien
l uis-ie mort . Mon corps e ft déja deuen u in fenfibl e ,
ny vos feux , ny vos cruautés n’
e fton n en t point mon
cœur , l’ayme mieux mourir au iourdhuy, que de
vous eitre redcuabl e d’
vn e vie , que vous ne me
donnés , qu’
à de li e in de me l ’
o l l cr par vu e trahifon
fun e l l e .
Tu parles trop rudement à tes [ 1 14] Amis , répondent les Iroquois , n ofl re cœur s
’accorde au ec nos
paroles .
l e vous con n oy bien , repart A cu eatè , voltre e l prit
e l l garuy de fept doublures , quand on en a tiré vu e ,
il en re ite encor fix . D ites—moy de grace , fi cette
trahifon que vous m achin e z fi adroitement , c il la der
niere de vos malices ? Vous vous cites oubliez des
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
paroles mutuelles , que s’
eftoien t données nos A n
ce ll rcs , lors qu’ ils prirent les armes les vu s contre les
autres . Que fi vn c fim pl e femme , l e m e ttoit en de
noir de dècouurir la Su [e ]ric , d’
arracher les bal l ons
qui la fou ll ien n en t , que les victorieux poferoien t l esarmes , pren droien t les vaincus à mercy . Vousanez violé cette loy : car non feulement vu e femme ;mais le grand Capitaine des François , a [ I 15] décounert cette Su erie fun e ite , où l e prennent les conclu
flous de la guerre ; il a par l es prefen s , arraché les
bal l ons qui la fou l l ien n en t , tafchan t de gagner les
Nations que vous appuyez , vous m éprifans l a
bonté , vous anez foulé aux pieds les ordres , la
parole de vos A uce l l res . Ils en rougili eut de hôte
au pays des Ames , voyan s que vous violez , aue c vu e
perfidie in fupportabl e , les loix de la nature , le droit
des Gens , toute la focietè humaine .
C èt homme prel ia ce point fi fortement , que le
Capitaine Iroquois,fut côtrain t d
’
auoüer qu i l s
anc ient tort , que dorefn auan t les cho l es pa li eroien t
d’
vu autre air .
Ils furent long-temps dans cette coute l l e . Le H u
ron ne pouuan t croire ce qu’ il voyoit ; les Iroquois
[ I 16] ne pouuan t luy pcrfuader , que c’
e fl oit vrayem ët
tout de bon,qu’ils anc ient des p en fée s de la paix .
Quoy qu’ il en l oit , les Iroquois , non feulement ne
firent aucun mal aux Hurons , mais ils ne parl eren t
plus que de fe l l in s , de réj oüili an ce , tant la face
des affaires l e vit changée en vu moment .E nfin , apres quelques entretiens d
’amitié , vn
Capitaine Iroquois s’
addre li an t au Capitaine Huron ,
le cougedian t auec honneur , luy dit , Mon Frere ,
RELA TION OF 1652 53
ing . Tell me , I beg you , whether this treachery
that you are devising with such skill is the last
of your knavish tricks . You have forgotten theexchange of promises that took place between our
Ancestors ,— when they took up arms , the on e side
against the other ,— to the effect that if a mere woman
should undertake to uncover the Sweat-house and
take away the stakes supporting it , the victors shouldlay down their arms and show mercy to the vanquished . You have violated this law ; for not merelya woman , but the great Captain of the French has[ 1 15] uncovered this ill-omened Sweat-house where
decisions of war are adopted . By his presents he
has taken away the stakes that support it , trying towin the N ations which you are upholding ; and you ,scorning his kindness , have trampled under foot the
orders and the promise of your Ancestors . They
blush with shame , in the land of Souls , at seeing
you violate , with an unbearable perfidy,the laws of
nature , the law of Nations , and all human society .
That man pressed this point so urgently that the
Iroquois Captain was forced to admit that they were
in the wrong , promising that in the future things
should go differently .
They were a long time engaged in this altercation ,the Huron being unable to believe what he saw
,and
the Iroquois [ 1 16] unable to persuade him that they
were really in earnest in entertaining thoughts ofpeace .
But , whatever the state of añairs , the Iroquois not
only did no harm to the Hurons,but they also talked
of nothing but feasting and rejoicing,— so greatly
was the aspect of affairs changed in a moment .At length , after some interchange of friendly
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
E t S agan , prens courage , vas faire reu erdir les cam
pagnes des François , par les bonnes n ouue l l es de la
paix , que nous voulons auoir auec eux , au e c tous
leurs Alliez . On luy rend tout fon bagage , ce l uy
de l es gens , à la referue d’
vn e arqu ebu l e qui s’
eftoit
égarée . Ce Capitaine Huron , ne pen fan t pas encor
[ I 17] e l l re en all urance , s’
écrie , Quoy donc , c ite-t’
on
les armes a vu homme,qui l e trouue l eul entre cinq
cens ? A me lme temps on iette à l es pieds , centa rqu ebu l es , pour en choifir vu e , en la place de la
fien n e , que quelque fol dat auoit en l euèe . Cela fait ,il s
’
em barque , auec le peu de l es gens qui luy
reft0ien t ; au e c les A m ba li adeurs d ’
Onn on taé , pour
voguer droit a la Bourgade des Trois R iuiere s .
Ce Capitaine , qu i e l l Chre ft ien , a dit depuis à vu
de nos P eres , qu’ il ne ercut point auoir la vie faune ,
iniques à ce qu ’ il vit fou canot , hors la portée des
m on iquets de l’armée ennemie : c’eil pour lors qu
’
il
s ’coria au ec S . P ierre , l e fçay maintenant que Dieu
m’
a de l iuré de la main des Iroquois .
Nos François qui ne fçau oien t [ I 18] rien , de ce qui
l e pa li oit dans le camp des E nnemis , furent bien
e fl on n e z , appren an s ces n ouue l l es . Ils ne fçauoien t
quafi , s’ ils les den oien t croire : mais enfin ils l e ren
dirent , quand ils eurent anis , qu’
vn Capitaine Iroquois
A n n iehron n on , nommé A ndioura , vou l oit de fcen dre
à Quebec,pour porter des prefen s à On n on tio ,
l’
a ll urcr des vol ôte z qu ’ ils auoien t tous de faire vu e
vraye paix .
Cèt homme partit des Trois R iu ieres , au oommen
cement du mois de S eptembre , anili -toit qu’ il fut
arriuè a Quebec , ayant rendu l es premieres vifites , il
ex pofa l es pre fen s , dont volcy la fign ification .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
Le premier e fl oit , pour éclaircir le Soleil , obfcurcypar les nuages , par les troubles de tant de guerres .
[ 1 19] Le fe con d e l l oit vu mets , qu’ il prefen toit à
Onn on tio , Gouuern cur des François : afin qu’
e l l an t
r epeu , il écoutait plus facilement les paroles de la
paix , puis que les longs difcours , ne fon t pas agre
ables , a ceux qui font à ieun .
Le troifiém e deuoit feru ir de cure oreille : afin que
les harangues fur vn l u j et fi aimable , en tra li cn t plusnettement dans l
'
on e l prit .
Le quatrième l e don n oit pour dre li er vn c Habita
t ion Fran çoil e dedans leurs terres , pour y former ,auec le temps , vn c belle Colonie .
Le cinquième , pour faire qu’
vn me lme cœur , vnme lme e l prit , animait dorefn auan t
,tous ceux qui
fcroicn t compris dans ce traité de paix .
Le fix ièm e e l l oit vn canot , ou [ 120] vn batteau ,pour porter Onn on tio en leur pays , quand il voudroit
donner vu e vifite à l e s Alliez .
Le feptièm e portoit vn c priere , à ce qu’
on les
l aill a it rembarquer en paix , pour retourner en leur
pays,lors qu ’ ils viendroien t vifiter leurs amis Fran
çois , Algonquins , Hurons .
Le huitième , dem an doit que la chali e fut commune ,entre toutes les Nations con federées , qu
’
on ne fit
plus la guerre qu ’aux E l au s , aux Gaitors , aux Ours ,aux Cerfs
,pour gonfl er tous en fem bl e les frian s
mets , qu’on tire de ces bons animaux .
Mon fieur le Gouuern eur répondit par d’
autres
pre fen s , qu Il fit expliquer par l on Interprete , à la
façon de ces peuples .
Le premier l e don n 01t , pour redre li er l’
e l prit
d’
A ndioura ,c
’
e fl le [ 12 1] nom du Capitaine Iroquois ,
R E LA TION OF 1652 —53
nin g of the month of September , and as soon as he
arrived at Quebec , after paying his first visits , he
displayed his presents,their meaning being as
follows
The first was to make bright the Sun , darkened by
the clouds and the disturbances of so many wars .
[ 1 19] The second was a dish which he presented to
Onn on tio ,Governor of the French , in order that ,
after satisfying his hunger , hc might listen more
readily to the words of peace , as l ong speeches are
not pleasing to those who are fasting .
The third was to serve as an ear-pick , in order
that the harangues upon so pleasant a theme might
enter his mind more distinctly .
The fourth was given for the building of a French
Settlement within their territory , and for the forma
tion there , in course of time , of a fine Colony .
The fifth , to cause that one and the same heart
and spirit should , in the future , animate all those
who should be embraced in this treaty of peace .
The sixth was a canoc or [ 120] boat , for carrying
On n on tio to their country when he wished to pay avisit to his Allies .
The seventh bore a petition that they be allowed
to embark again in peace and return to their coun
try , when they came to visit their French ,Algonquin
,
and Huron friends .
The eighth asked that the hunting might be
shared by all the confederated Nations,and that
there might be no more war except on the E lks ,Beavers , Bears , and D eer ,— in order that all might
enjoy together the dainty dishes that are obtained
from these good animals .
Monsieur the Governor made answer by means of
L E S RE L A TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
qui ven oit d ’
e x pofer l es pre fen s . S i ton e l prit e l l
encor tortu , luy dit le Truchement , voicy dequoy le
redre li er , afin que tes pen fées foien t droites .
Le fe con d , e ll oit pour l’
a l l urer , que nous n’
au iôs
plus qu’
vn cœur aue c luy , auec tous ceux de l a
Nation .
Le troifiém e , pour concourir au ec eux , a dre li erappl an ir les chemins d
’
vu pays à l ’autre : afin de l evifiter les vu s les autres , auec plus de facilité .
Le quatrième , pour c il endre vn tapis , ou vn c nappeaux Trois R iu iere s , où l e tien droien t les con feil s ,les a li cm bl ècs de toutes les Nations .
Le cinquième , pour difpofer vn lieu dans leurpays , Où feroien t ex pofe z , les prefen s d
’
On n on tio .
[ 12 2 ] Le fix ièm e , e l l oit pour rompre les liens , qui
ten oien t captif en leur pays le Pere Iofeph Pou ce t ,que tous les François hon oroien t , qu ’ ils deman
doien t au e c inl l an ce .
Le l eptièm e , pour le re l euer de la place , où il e l l oit
couché , lié , garotté .
Le huitième , pour luy ouurir la porte de la cabane ,où il e l l oit logé .
Le n eufièm e , pour adoucir les fatigues , qu Il deuoit
fou lfrir en fon chemin , a l ou retour .
Le dernier pre fen t , e l l oit com pofé de fix capots ou
e fpeces de cafaques , de fix tapab0rs , de deux
grands colliers de porcelaine , qui furent offerts auxfix A m ba liadeurs , pour les defendre contre les in iures
du temps,dans leur voyage , pour fou l ager les
peines , [ 12 3 ] qu i l s denoien t fou lfrir en chemin .
Il l e fit quelques harangues , apres la di l l ribu tion
de ces prefen s . N oel T ckou erim at Algonquin ,inueétiua pu ili am m en t contre la pcrfidie des Iroquois ,
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
leur reprochant qu Ils auoien t tué par cinq ou fix fois
de leurs A n ce l l res , a l’heure me lme qu ’ ils rem en oiët
des prifon n icrs Iroquois en leur pays , pour recher
cher la paix . Que les Algonquins anc ient recen au echonneur , tous les Iroquois qui les e l l oien t venus
vifiter en leur pays . Qu ’au reite , que s'ils anc ient
de li ein de contract er vu e veritable alliance , il s renu oyroicn t p l ufieurs femmes , qu
’ ils re ten oien t dan s la
captiu ité ; que fi elles e l l oien t mariées , leurs maris
les pourroien t fu iure , pour demeurer au ec elles au
pays des Algonquins ; [ 12 4 ] que fi ce pays ne leur
e l l oit pas agreable , qu Ils les pourroien t rem en er au
lieu d ’où ils les auroien t amenées : que c’e l l ain fi
qu ’en violent leurs Alliez , qui demeurent fur lesriuages de la mer , en l
’
A cadie .
Vn Capitaine Huron repartit , qu ’il fal l oit mainte
nant oublier les anciennes querelles , que fi l ’Irc
quois auoit mal traité les Algonquins , qu ’il leur
rendoit la pareille , ayant rabai li è leur in fol en ce , par
vn c autre in fol en ce : que le Ciel punit ordinaire
ment au double , ceux qui abu l en t de l es faneurs dans
leurs victoires .Mon fieur le Gouuern eur fit dire par fon Truche
ment,qu’il auoit toufiours defiré d
’
e l l rc le Mediateur
de la paix publique . Qu ’il n ’
auoit point encor pris
les armes contre les Iroquois , que [ 12 5] s’il cut
donné liberté a l es gens de les attaquer , qu’il y a
long—temps que leurs Bourgades feroien t reduites
en cendre . Qu ’ ils anc ient tres-bien fait de recher
cher fon alliance : pource qu’ il l e l a li oit de crier fi
fouu en t ; la paix , la paix . Que fi prefen tcm en t , on
ne la fa ifoit pas au e c fiu ceritè , que les perfides éprou
ucroie n t la colere des François . Qu’
au reite Annon
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
the inclemency of the weather on their journey , and
to lighten the fatigues [ 12 3 ] which they must undergo
on the way .
After the distribution of these presents , a number
of speeches were made . Noel T ekouerim at , au
Algonquin , inveighed forcibly against the perfidy of
the Iroquois ,— reproaching them with having killed ,on five or six occasions , some of the Algonquins ’
Ancestors at the very time when the latter were conducting some Iroquois prisoners back to their owncountry , in order to seek peace ; while the Algonquins had received with honor all the Iroquois who
had come to their country to visit them . Besides,
he said , if they purposed the formation of a genuine
a lliance , they would send back a number of women
whom they were holding in captivity ; if these were
m arried , their husbands could follow them , to dwellwith them in the country of the Algonquins ; [ 12 4]a nd if this country did n ot please them , the Iroquois
could take them back to the place whence they had
brought them . S uch , he said , was the usage of their
Allies who dwelt on the sea—coast in Acadia .
A Huron Captain made answer that the o l d disputesmust now be forgotten ; that , if the Iroquois had
treated the Algonquins ill,he was paying them back
like for like , in humbling their insolence by another
insolence ; and that Heaven generally punishes in
twofold measure those who abuse its favors in theirvictories .Monsieur the Governor made reply through hisInterpreter , to the effect that he had always desiredt o be the Mediator of public peace ; that he had n otyet taken up arms against the Iroquois ; and that ,
[ 12 5] if he had permitted his people to attack them ,
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ ÉS UITE S [VOL. 40
hiafè , c’e l l Mon fieur de Maifon n euue , Gouuern eur de
Montreal , deuolt aborder au pl u to l l , qu ’ il am en oit
quantité de fol dats , pour ranger nos ennemis à leur
deuoir .
Vn Capitaine Huron con cl ud le con feil , par vn c
petite harangue fort éloquente , pre li an t les Iroquois ,de ramener au p l u ito l l le P ere Pou cet . S çache z ,
leur difoit—il , qu’ il e l l le Pere des François , de s
Algonquins , des Hurons : [ 126] qu ’ il nous en
feigne a tous le chemin du Ciel , chacun en n ofl re
langue . S oyez afi eure z que la paix , qui fera con
firm èe par la de l iuran ce d’
vu tel perfon n age , fera
in u iol abl e de n ofl re co l l é ; que vous la cimenterez
plus fortem ët , en le rendant aux François , que fi
vous nous rameniez vn monde entier de Hurons ,voire melme d ’autres François , fi vous les teniezdans la captiuitè .
Les harangues finies , les prefen s donnez ,acceptez de part d ’autre : on témoigna quelques
réj oüill an ces de tous co l l ez , en fuite les Ambali adeu rs On n on taeron n on s , A n n iehron n on s , s
’en
retourn eren t en leur pays .
Tout cela l e pali a au mois de Septembre : mais
enfin,le Pere Iofeph Pou cet paroiflan t à Quebec , le
cinquième de N ou em bre , [ 12 7] remplit tous les cœurs
des François , de ioye , d’
al l egrefl e . Les lettresles memoires , qui parl oien t de fou arriuée , des
con fe il s tenus pour la con cl ufion de la paix , on t c ité
perdus,dans le vaili eau pris par les A ngl ois . Voicy
deux petits mots , tirez d’
vn e lettre écrite à vu e
perfon n e de condition , qui difeut beaucoup en peu
de paroles . Il a donc pleu à D ieu , d’
ex au cer nos
prieres,de nous rendre le bon Pere Pou cet . Sept
L E S R E L A TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL 40
Iroquois l ’ont ramené auec huit pre fen s ; qui fon t
les prem ices , de ceux que leurs Anciens doiu en tapporter au P rintemps , pour e ll ab l ir la paix gene
rale , qui fem bl e con cl uë . Le Pere Pou cet all ure furl a vi e , de la fin cerité de s intentions des E nnemis .
Dieu veuille qu ’ il ne l e trompe pas . Amen , Amen .
[ 12 8] Ces derniers A m ba li adeurs , voyaus que la
fai l on s’
auan çoit , que les glaces les pourroicn t
arrefter en chemin dans vn long voyage , ex poferen t
briéuem en t leur legation , don n eren t leurs pre fe n s ,au ec all urance , que la paix qu
’ils fail oieu t feroit
inu iol abl e de leur co l l é , apres auoir pris congé ,receu des témoignages reciproques de la bonne
volonté des François , ils leur l ai li cren t le pl aifir
la ioye , qu’
apporte vn c paix fi long—temps defirèe .
Bon—heur que ie fouhaitte à la France , de toutel
’
e ftenduë de m on cœur .
RELA TION OF 1652—53
are two short extracts taken from a letter written to
a person of quality ; they say much in a fewwords
God has,then , been pleased to answer ou r prayers
and give back to us the good Father Pou ce t . Seven
Iroquois escorted him home with eight presents ,which are an earnest of those which their E lders
are to bring in the S pring for the establishment
of the general peace , which seems to be decided
upon . Father Pou ce t pledges his life for the sin cer
ity of the E nemy’s intentions . God grant he may
n ot be deceived . Amen,Amen .
[ 12 8] These last Ambassadors , seeing that the
season was advancing , and that the ice might bar
their way on a long journey, briefly stated the pur
pose of their embassy , and gave their presents with
the assurance that the peace they were making would
be inviolable on their side . Then , after taking
leave , and receiving reciprocal testimonials of the
good-will of the French,they left with the latter the
pleasure and j oy resulting from a peace so long
desired ,— a happiness which I wish to France withall my heart .
L E S R ELA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
[ 129] CHA PITRE V I .
D E L A PA IX FA IT E A U E C VN E N AT ION QU I HAB IT E D U
COSTE D U SU D A L’
E GAR D D E QU E BE C .
L fem bl e que D ieu ait voulu donner, vn c paix ,
vn iuerfe l l e , a la N ouue l l e France . P l aife à l aB on tè
, de la rendre l l abl e , fo l ide . N euf A l
gonqn in s , de la R efideu ce de fain ét Iofeph a Sillery ,e l l ans allez , au mois de N ou em bre , à la chali e duCa l l or , s
’
écarteren t de quatre ion rn ée s , des rines du
grand fleuu e , du co l l é du Sud—e l l , c’
e it à dire , entrel
’
Orien t le Midy . Comme ils m archoien t , à la
pointe du lour , dans ces grandes fore l l s : cherchan s
quelques lacs , ou quelques riuieres , où les Gaitors
bafl ireu t leurs m aifon s : [ 130] ils reu con trereu t les
pi l l es de quelques hommes . Ils crurent au ll i -toit ,que c ’
e l toien t des Iroquois . Ils marchent fur leurs
brifées , fur leurs traces, qu ittan s la chali e des
Ca l l ors , pour chali er aux hommes . Ils doubl oien t
le pas , mais fans bruit , pour n’
e l l re dècouu erts .
E nfin ils trouueren t , denaut que le S oleil parut , cinq
hommes endormis , dans vn c cabane pa li agere , qu’ ils
auoien t dre li ée , à la façon des cha li eurs . Ils l e ie tten t
anil i-toit fur leur proye . L’
vn d’
iceux vou l ät vier
de refi l tan ce , fut arre l té par vn coup de fufil , qu’
vn
Algonquin luy tira dans la cu ili e . E n vn m ot , ils l e
virent dans les liens des hommes , quafi denaut que
d’
e l l re de l iure z des liens du fom m e il .
A ufii -to l t que n os gens eurent fait cette prife , ils
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
perdent la pen fée [ 13 1] des Ca il ors , ram en an s ces
captifs à Sillery . Or comme il y auoit en cette R efi
dence , vn ramas de diu erfes Nations , dont vu e partie
n’
e ftoien t pas encor Chre il ien s : ils receurcn t ces
captifs d ’
vn e c itrange façon . On les charge de
coups de bal l ons , on leur arrache les ongles , on leur
coupe quelques doigts,ou leur applique des tifon s de
feu : bref on les traite en S aunages , comme des
ennemis des Saunages . Noel T ekou erim at , bon
Chre il ien , Capitaine de cette R efideu ce , ayant
ouy parler ces prifon n icrs , dit tout haut , qu’ ils
n’
cfl 0ien t pas Iroquois , qu ’ il dou toit fort , qu’ ils
fu l l eu t de leurs Alliez . Ils font , dil oit - il , A bn aqu iois
ou voifin s ,‘
amis des A bn aqu iois . Il a j ou ftoit ,
qu’
e l tan t vers les co l l es de la N ouue l l e A ng[l ]eterre ,
au dernier [ 13 2 ] voyage qu’ il au oit fait , au païs des
A bn aqu iois , il croyoit auoir veu que l qu’
vn de ces
vifages . Cela arre fl a le coup de leur mort : mais
il n’
appail a pas la fureur de ceux , qui e l l ans en
ragez contre les Iroquois , fouhaitoie n t d’
aflouu ir
leur vengeance fur ces panures m iferabl es . E t pour
l es faire mourir auec quelque l u l l ice , il s dirent , qu’ il
l e fa l l oit a li em bl er pour de l iberer de leur vie , ou de
l eur mort .
Noel,qui vit bien que la paflion , non la rai l on ,
aflem bl oit ce con fe il , ne s’y voulut pas trouuer . Les
faétieu x ne l ai li en t pas de pali er outre ; ils con dam
nent au feu ces panures viétim es . N o l tre Capitaine
Chre il ien voyant ce de fordre ,fait des pre fen s pour
rachepter leur vie . On fait derechef vu e a ll em bl ée
on donne la [ 13 3 ] vie à quatre , on veut brufier le
cinquième . Mais N oel , voyant que ces a li em bl ée s
n’
eft oien t pas de tou tes les Nations in terre li èes
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
captives back to Sillery . Now , as there was at this
R esidence a gathering from different Nations , a part
of whom were n ot yet Christians , they gave the
prisoners a strange reception . They were belabored
with blows ; their nails were torn out , an d some of
their fingers cut off firebran ds were applied to their
bodies ; and , in short , they were treated like Savages
and enemies of Savages . N oel T ekouerim at , a good
Christian and the Captain of this R esidence , after
hearing these prisoners talk,said emphatically that
they were not Iroquois , and that he doubted very
much whether they were Allies of the latter . T hey
are , said he , A bn aqu iois , or neighbors and friends
of the A bn aqu iois . He added that , when he was in
the neighborhood of N ew E ngland , on the last [ 13 2 ]j ourney he had made to the country of the A bn aqu iois ,he thought he had seen on e of those faces . This
statement arrested their execution , but did n ot ap
pease the fury of those who , being enraged against
the Iroquois , wished to wreak their vengeance upon
these poor wretches . And in order to make themdie with some show of j ustice , they said au assembly
must be held to deliberate upon their life or death .
Noel , seeing plainly that passion and not reason
was calling this council , would not attend it . The
fact ion s element did not cease its proceedings,but
condemned these poor victims to the ñames . Our
Christian Captain , seeing this lawless conduct , made
presents for the ransom of their lives . Again au
assembly was called , and [ 13 3 ] four of the men were
given their lives , while it was desired to burn thefifth . But N oel , seeing that these assemblies were
not composed of all the Nations interested in the
war , exclaimed that a general council of all the chief
L E S R E LA TION S D E S ] ÉS U I TE S [VOL. 40
dedans la guerre ; s’
écrie , qu’ il faut tenir vn con feil
vn iu erfe l , de tous les principaux , qui l e trouuoien t
p our lors au pays , qu ’ il ne fal l oit pas proceder àla legere , dans des affaires fi im portan s : où il s
’agi l
l oit de la vie des hommes , peut-eitre d ’
vn c n ou
nelle guerre . Cet anis fut fu iuy. On s ’
affem bl e , les
Capitaines haranguent à leur tour . L ’auis commun ,le plus vn iuerfe l , fut , qu
’ ils e l l oien t tous cou
pabl e s , ou tous innocens , par con fequ en t qu'
ils
denoien t tous mourir , ou qu’ il leur fal l oit donner la
vie à tous . Là de li us , comme la paix n’
e l l oit pas
encor faite auec les Iroquois , N oel T ckou erim at parle
fortement , difan t [ 134] que nous anions all ez d’ enne
mis fur les bras , qu’ il ne fal l oit pas en multiplier le
nombre ; que ces panures gens ne ven oien t point en
guerre ; que c’
e l toien t des Cha li eurs , qu ’ il les
fa l l oit renu oyer en leur pays .
Les principaux du Con fe il , fu iuau s cette pen fée ,
conclurent qu ’ il n ’en fa l l oit faire mourir aucun :
qu ’ il e l l oit à propos d ’ en ren uoyer deux en leur
pays : pour donner anis à leur Nation , de ce qui
s’
e itoit pa li é . On les fit venir fur l’
heure me lme
dans l ’
a li em bl ée : où ils parurent liez , tous nuds ,excepté leur brayer . Ils s
’
afiiren t à platte terre ,pour entendre leur fen ten ce , qui les réj ouyt fort .
Vn Capitaine prenant la parole , fit vn c petite harau
gue ,leur difau t , qu
’ ils anc ient tous la vie : que pas
vu d ’ eux ne m ourroit : [ 13 5] qu’ ils e l l oien t libres .
A me lme temps , on coupe leurs liens , qu’on ie tte au
feu , ou les fait lener debout : ou leur donne à chacundequoy l e couurir : on les exhorte à chanter , àdanier , a l e réj ouyr , puis qu
’ ils e l l oien t parm y
l eurs amis . Ce commandement fut ex ecuté fur
L E S RE L A TIONS D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
l’heure , promptement , ioyeu fcm en t , m agn ifique
ment , dil en t les memoires , qui font venus iniques a
nous .
Apres quelque temps de réj ouyfian ce : on en ren
u0ya deux en leur pays , on retint les trois autres
e n o l l ages . Leur com m ilfion con ten oit trois articles,
difi ingue z par trois petits bal l ons , qu’on leur mit en
main . Le premier port , qu’
on les renuoyo it pour
e x pofer aux principaux de leur N ation , comme ils
anc ient e fl é pris , de l iure z . Le fe cond , [ 136] qu’ ils
retourn a li en t , au commencement de l’
E l l é fuiuan t .
Le troifiém e,qu ’ ils retira ll en t des mains d ’
vn e Na
tion , qui leur e l l amie , voifin e , nommée S okoueki ;quelques -vu s de leurs parens captifs depuis deux ans
qu ’ il les am en a li eu t a Sillery , s’ ils auoien t defir
de contracter alliance , au ec les peuples qui s ’y
retirent ordinairement : que la veu ë de ces captifs,
adouciroit les yeux de ceux qui ne les anc ient pas
regardez de bonne grace , qu ’ ils feroien t le nœud
de l ’ancienne amitié , qu’ ils auoien t euë autrefois par
e n fem bl e . Ces bonnes‘
gens l e voyan s decl arez
innocens ne dem andercn t point reparation des torts ,qu ’on leur au oit faits . Ils ne l e plaignirent point ,des coups de ba l l on s , qu
’on leur auoit donnez , ny
des feux,qu ’on au oit appliqués [ 13 7] fur leurs corps .
Ils ne pre li eren t point la re fl itu tion des ongles , qu’on
leur auoit arrachez , ny des doigts , qu’on leur auoit
coupez . Tous ces preludes fon t comptez pour neant
pouru eu qu’on n
’
oft e point la vie ; le reite pa li e
comme vu petit ieu . Les femmes , difcn t—ils , enfou ffriroien t bien autant fan s m ot dire .
Ils partirent au commencement de D ecembre , de
l ’an 1652 . ils parurent fur le grand fleuu e , a la fin
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
promptly,joyfully
,and in fine style , as the account
says which has reached us .
After som e time of rejoicing , two of them were
sent back to their own country , and the three others
were retained as hostages . Their commission em
braced three articles , distinguished by three littlesticks that were put into their hands . The purportof the first was , that they were sen t home to describe
to the chief men of their Nation how they had been
captured and delivered . The second said [ 136] that
they must come back again , at the beginning of the
following Summer . The third was a petition thatthey should rescue from the hands of a N ation called
S okou ek i , friends and neighbors of theirs , some of
the petitioners ’ kinsfolk , who had been two years in
captivity ; and that they should bring them to Sillery ,if they desired to form au alliance with the peoples
who commonly resort thither . The sight of these
captives would , it was urged , soften the looks of
those who had n ot regarded them favorably ; and
they would serve to tie the knot of the o l d—timefriendship that had once been maintained between
them . These simple souls , finding themselves
declared innocent , demanded no reparation for the
injuries don e them . They did not complain of the
blows in flictcd , or of the fire that had been applied
[ 13 7] to their bodies . They did not urge the restitu
tion of nails torn on t , or of fingers on t off . All thesepreliminaries are accounted as nothing ; provided
life is not taken , the rest passes for a little sport .E ven women , they say , would endure as muchwithout a murmur .
They departed in the beginning of D ecember of
the year 1652 , and made their appearance on the
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
du mois de May, de l’an pali é 1653 . Si toit qu i l s
apperceuren t la demeure des François , des S an
nages de S illery , ils firent refor mer leurs tambours ,en ligne de paix , de rè j ouyli an ce . Ils am en oien t
deux vieillards , des plus con fidcrabl es de leur pays,
chargez de pre fen s , qui e ll oien t comme les ordres ,les com m iffion s , [ 13 8] qui leur au oien t cité données .
Les Algonquins accouran s fur les rines du grâd fleuue ,
ne voyan s point les captifs , qu’ ils anc ient deman
dez , furent d’abord m ècon ten s : mais ces Ambali a
deurs fçachan s bien , qu’ils m anquoien t au point le
plus important , rendirent de fi fortes rai l on s de leur
procedè : qu’ ils calm eren t les efpris des m écon ten s .
Peut-eitre que ces captifs e l l oien t morts . L e s
memoires , les lettres que i ’ay receuës , n’
en dil en t
rien .
Les efprits e ll ans appaife z . Ces n ouueaux hoftes
furent appe l l e z au con feil , le lendemain de leur arri
n ée . L’
a li em bl èe l e tint en vu e fale de n ofl re petite
m aifon , où nous receuon s , où nous in l l ru ifon s l es
l anuages . On commença par l ’
ex hibition des pre
fens , qu’on e l l endit fur vue corde , qui trauerfoit
[ 139] toute la fale . Ce n ’
e ftoien t que des coliers de
porcelaine fort larges , des bracelets , des pendan s
d ’oreilles : des calumets , ou pe tun oirs . Chacun
ayant pris l a place : le plus ancien de ces Ambali ad eurs , prit la parole , difan t à toute l
’
affiitan ce , qu’ il
ven oit de déplier l’affection , l ’amitié de ceux de l a
nation, figurée fur ces coliers ; que leur cœur e l l oit
t out onnert , qu’ il n ’y auoit aucun ply , qu
’on voyoit
dans l es paroles , le fond de leurs ames . E t l à. -de lius ,t irant vn autre grand collier , il . l
’
e l l en dit au milieu
d e la pl ace , difan t . Voila . l e chemin , qu’
il faut
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
tenir , pour venir vifiter vos amis . Ce col l er e fl oit
com pofè de porcelaine blanche , violette,en forte
qu’ il y au oit figures , que ce bon homme ex p l iquoit a
l a mode . Voila , dil oit -il , les lacs , [ 140] voila les
riu ieres , voila les m on tagn es , les vallées,qu ’ il faut
pa li er ; voila les portages , les cheutes d ’eau . R e
marquez tout ; afin , que dans les vifites , que nous
nous rendrons les vu s aux autres , pcr l on n e ne s’é
gare . Les chemins feront maintenant faciles : on ne
craindra plus les em bu l cades . Tous ceux qu ’on ren
contrera , feront autant d’amis .
Cela fait , il l e l eue ,s
’
approchan t des prefen s
e fl eudus , comme i’
ay defia dit , il en donn a l’
ex pl ica
tion , comme ou feroit d’
vu enigme , touchant les
p erfon n ages du tableau , les vu s apres les autres .
Voila , faifoit-il , m on l l ran t le premier pre l en t , le
l iure , ou le papier , où font peints les ordres ,les com m ifii on s , que i
’
ay receuës de m on pays ,les affaires que i ’ay a vous communiquer . [ 14 1]Quiconque m èprifera ,
ce que porte cette peinture , ou
cèt écrit , merite qu’on 1ny ca ll e la te l l e .
Touchant le fecon d prefen t , qui fail oit vn c grande
ceinture de porcelaine . Allons mes freres , l eue zvous
,ceignez-vous de cette ceinture , allons de
compagnie à la chali e de l ’
E l au , du Cail or .
Le troifièm c , e fl oit com pofé de quelques bal l ons
de porcelaine , qu’ ils portent à leurs oreilles , fi prodi
gieu l em en t percées , qu’on y pali e ail ém en t vn gros
ba l l on de cire d'
E l pagn e . Voila , s’
écria -il , pour
percer vos oreilles : afin que nous pu ill ion s nous parler
les vu s les autres , comme font les amis , que nous
a lfifl ion s aux con fe il s les vu s des autres .
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
T his collar was composed of white and violet-colored
p orcelain , so arranged as to form figures , which this
worthy man explained after his own fashion .
There,said he , are the lakes , [ 140] there the
rivers,there the mountains and valleys that must be
passed ; and there are the portages and waterfalls .N ote everything , to the end that , in the visits that
we shall pay one another , no one may get lost . The
roads will be easy n ow, and n o more ambuscades
will be feared . All persons who are met will be somany friends .
That don e , he arose ; and , approaching the pres
e nts as they hung there , in the manner I have already
described , he gave au explanation of them , as one
would of an enigma , regarding the personages of the
p icture , on e after the other . There , said he ,pointing to the first present
,is the book , or the
paper , wherein are painted the orders and commis
sions that I have received from my country , and the
matters that I have to communicate to you . [ 14 1]Whoever shall lightly esteem the purport of this
painting or writing , deserves to have his head
broken .
Concerning the second present , composed of a large
b e l l of porcelain , he said : Come,brothers , arise
and gird yourselves with this belt ; and let us go
together to hunt the E l k and the Beaver .
The third was composed of some sticks of poroc
lain , worn by them in their cars , which are pierced
with such very large holes as easily to receive a
great stick of Spanish wax . Those,he exclaimed ,
are for piercing your cars , in order that we may
speak to on e another as friends are wont to do , and
that we may take part in one another ’s councils .
Le quatrième , com po l è de fix grands coliers , pour
les fix N ations, [ 14 2 ] auec l efque l l es ces Ambali a
denrs ren ouu e l l oien t leurs alliances , repre fen toit
les robes , dont elles l e denoien t reu e l l ir . . Comme
nous u ’
auon s plus qu’
vn cœur , il ne faut plus qu’
vn e
façon d’
habits , ou de robes : afin que tous ceux
qui nous verrôt , croyen t que nous fom m es tous
freres , ve l l us de me lme parure ; que ce l uy qui en
offen fera l’
vn , offen fera l’autre .
Cela fait : ce bon homme s’
affit au milieu de la
place . Il prend deux grands pe tun oirs , faits d’
vn e
pierre verte , belle , fort pol ie , longs d’
vn e coudée ,c
’
eftoit le cinquième pre l en t . Il en remplit vu de
tabac , il y met le feu , en fu cce , ou en tire la fumée
fort grau em en t . Toute l ’
a li em bl ée le regardoit , ne
fçachan t pas ce qu’ il vou l oit dire . E nfin apres auoir
[ 14 3 ] b ien petun é a l ou ai l e . Mes freres , dit-il , ces
deux pipes , ou ces deux p etun oirs , font à vous . Il
faut dorefn auan t , que nous n’ayons plus qu
’
vn fouil l e ,
qu’
vn e feule rc l piration , puis que nous n’
auon s
plus qu’
vn e me lme ame .
E t venant au fix iém e pre l en t , qui confil l oit en des
liens de porcelaine , enfi l e z en brail es , en quelques
coliers . Ah ! mes freres , s ’
écria -t ’ il , qu e les liens de
ces panures prifon n icrs , nous ont mis en grand dau
ger de tous co l l ez ! mais enfin les voila bas ; le danger
e l l pali é . Vos P eres , on t autrefois contracté alliance ,auec nos A n ce l l res : cela s
’
e ftoit mis en oubly : vn
manuais rencontre , a fait du mal à n os gens ,du bien à toutes nos Nations : car nous ne nouscon n oiliiou s plus : nous citions égarez , nous voila
reunis . Ouy, [ 144 ] mais nos panures gens , on t les
doigts coupez ? on les a baft0n n c z ? on les a tourm en
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
tez ? ce n ’e l l pas vous , m es freres , qui anez fait ce
coup . Ce fou t ces m e l chan s Iroquois , qui vous on t
tant fai t de mal . Vo ltre vene bl e li ée par ces mal
heureux , nous a pris pour des ennemis : vous nous
anez frape z , croyan s frapper des Iroquois . C ’e l l vu e
m èpr il c : nous n’en dil on s mot .
S on difcou rs finit . Noel T ekouerim at , Capitaine
de S illery , prit la parole , au nom de tous les autres
Capitaines . Il remercia fort humainement ces A m
ba ll adeurs , les louant de ce qu' ils auoien t de l ’amour
pour la paix , pour la bonne intelligence , au ec
les Alliez de leurs A u ce l l res . E t pourfu iuan t fou
difcours , il fit voir a toute l’
a li em bl ée , notamment
[ 14 5] aux Hurons , qui s’
e ftoien t m on ll re z fort con
traires aux pen fées de la paix , pre uan s ces prifon n icrs
pour de vrais ennemis , combien il e fl oit important ,de ne l e point precipiter , en des affaires de telle
con fequ en ce : combien il e fl oit à propos , de reu oüer
l ’ancienne amitié , qu’ ils au oien t euë au e c ces peuples .
Pour con cl ufion : les A m ba li adeurs , voyan s qu’ ils
anc ient cité écoutez faucrabl em en t , qu'on au oit agrée
leurs prefen s , re l a l ché leurs prifon n icrs , l e mirent
à danier , à entonner vn c ohan l on , de toute l’eiten
du ë de leur voix , de toute la force de leur pou lm on
leur chau l on ne portoit que ces trois mots : C'
e ft
maintenant qu ’ il l e faut rè j ouyr , pu il que nos pre fen s
sôt acceptez . La ieun e ll e , par le côm andem en t [ 146]des Capitaines , l e mit de la partie , pour rendre la
ioye publique : les ieun es hôm es dan çan s à. part ,les filles à part , l e fu iuau s n ean tm oin s les vu s les
autres,à la mode du pays . A in fi l e termina toute
cette cerem on ie .
R E LA TION OF 1652—53
they not been beaten and tortured ? It is not you ,
my brothers,who dealt this blow ; it is those wicked
Iroquois,who have done you so much harm . Your
eyes,injured by those wretches , took us for enemies ,
and you struck us , thinking you were striking Iro
quois . It was a mistake ; we will say nothing about
it .
” 9
His speech ended , Noel T ekouerim at , Captain of
S illery , took the word , in the name of all the other
Captains . He thanked these Ambassadors verykindly
,praising them for entertaining a love for
peace and a good understanding with their Ancestors ’
Allies . And,continuing his speech , he made it
manifest to all the assembly , and especially [ 14 5] to
the Hurons , — who had shown themselves much
opposed to thoughts of peace , taking these prisoners
for real enemies ,— how important it was n ot to act
with precipitation in affairs of such consequence ;and how fitting it was to reestablish the o l d-time
friendship they had had with these peoples .
In conclusion , the Ambassadors , seeing that theyhad been heard with favor
,that their presents had
been accepted , and their prisoners set free , began to
dance , and to sing a song with the full volume of
their voices an d all the strength of their lungs .
Their song contained only these few words : N ow
is the time to rejoice , since our presents are accepted .
By order of the Captains,the young people [ 146]
joined them , in order to render the joy public ,— the
young men dancing by themselves and the girls bythemselves , following on e another , however , after
the manner of the country . Thus ended that wholeceremony .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
CHA PITRE VI I .
L A PA U U R E TÉ L E S R ICHE S SE S D U PAYS .
AMA IS il n ’y eut plus de Gaitors dans nos lacs ,dans n os riu ieres : mais lamais il ne s
’en e l l
moins veu dans les m agafin s du pays . A uan t
la de fol ation des Hurons , les cent canots ven oien t en
traite , t ous chargez de Ca l l or . Les Algonquins enapportoien t de tous co l l ez , chaque année , on en
auoit pour deux cens pour [ 14 7] trois cens mil
liures . C’
e il oit -là vn beau rencun , dequoy contenter
tout le monde , dequoy l upporter les grandes
charges du pays .
La guerre des Iroquois a fait tarir toutes cesfources . Les Ca l l ors dem euran s en paix , dans le
lieu de leur repos . Les flottes de Hurons ne defcendent plus à la traite . Les Algonquins fon t depenp l c z : les N ations plus efloign ées , l e retirent encore
plus loin, craign an s le feu des Iroquois . Le m agafin
de Montreal , n’a pas achepté des S aunages vn l eul
Ca l l or , depuis vu au . Aux Trois R iu ieres , le peuqui s ’y e l l veu , a cité employé pour fortifier la place ,
où on atten doit l’
en n cm y. D ans le magasin de Que
bec , ce n’
c l l que pauureté ; a in fi tout le monde a
fu j e t d’
e l l re mécontent , n’y [ 14 8] ayant pas de quoy
fournir,au payement de ceux , a qui il e l l deu :
me lme n’y ayant pas de qu oy l upporter vu e partie
des charges du pays , les plus in difpeh l abl es .
Les riu ieres les plus profondes , les plus riches
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL . 40
de la terre , l eroien t bien—toit a l eo , fi leurs eaux s’ ef
coul ans dans la Mer , les fources n’en fourn ili oien t
plus de n ouue l l es . Les Villes , les Prouin ces plus
proches de la Mer , qui en auroien t cité autrefois les
plus richement arrou l ée s , auroien t tort de l e plaindre ,des Prou in ces plus voifin es des fources , comme fi elles
re ten oien t toutes les eaux pour elles , les en u oyoien t
au public .
Ce fon t les Iroquois , dont il l e faut plaindre : car
ce fou t eux , qui ont arre l té les eaux dedans leurs
fources . l e veux dire , que ce fon t eux qui empel
chent tout le commerce [ 149] des Gaitors , qui on t
toûj ours cité les grandes riche ll es de ce pays .
Mais maintenant , fi D ieu benit n os e fperan ce s , de
la paix au ec les Iroquois , on fera bonne guerre auxGaitors , ils trouueron t le chemin des m agafin s de
Montreal , des Trois R iu ieres , de Quebec , qu’ils
ont oublié depuis ces dernieres années . Les Nationsfuperieures de fcen dron t au ec ioye , apporteront les
Ca ll ors , dont ils on t fait amas depuis trois ans .
Ce Printemps , trois canots arriu eren t aux Trois
R iuiere s , de l’ancien pays des Hurons , ou p l u tofl du
profond des terres , les plus cachées de ces co l l ez-là :
où diu erf_
e s familles l e fon t retirées hors le commerce
de tout le reite des hommes , crainte que les Iroquois
[ 150] ne les y al l a ll en t trouu er .
Ces trois canots , conduits par vn Saunage Chre
itien , e l l oien t de quatre N ations diff erentes , qui nous
on t apporté d ’excellentes n ouu e l l e s . S çauoir , qu’
ils
s’
a li em bl en t , en vu tres -beau pays , en u iron à centcinquante lieues , plus loin que les Hurons , tirans
vers l ’Occiden t , au nombre de deux mille hommes ,
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
would soon be dry il , when their waters ran into the
Sea,the Springs ceased to furnish fresh supplies .
The Cities and Provinces nearer the S ea , and for
merly the most abundantly watered by it , would be
wrong to complain of the Provinces nearer the watersources
,as if they reta ined all the water for them
selves and sent it ou t to the public .
It is the Iroquois of whom complaint must be
made , for it is they who have stopped the water at
its fountainhead . I mean , it is they that are
preventing all the trade [ 149] in Beaver-skins , which
have always been the chief wealth of this country .
But now , if God bless our hopes of peace with the
Iroquois,a fine war will be made on the Beavers , and
they will find the road to the warehouses of Montreal , Three R ivers , and Quebec , which they haveforgotten during these later years . The upper
Nations will come down with j oy, and will bring
the Beaver-skins which they have been amassing for
the past three years .
This Spring , three can ocs arrived at Three R iversfrom the former country of the Hurons ,— or , rather ,from the depths of the most hidden recesses of those
regions , whither several families have withdrawn ,ou t of all communication with the rest of mankind ,for fear lest the Iroquois [ 150] might go and find
them there .
These three canoes , led by a Christian S avage ,contained people from four different Nations , who
brought us excellent news . T his was,that theywere
gathering together , to the number of two thousand
men , in a very fine country about a hundred andfifty leagues fart her away than the Hurons , towardthe West ; an d that they were to come the next
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL 40
qu ’ils doiu en t venir de compagnie le P rintem ps
prochain , apporter grand nombre de Cail or , pour
faire leur trafic ordinaire , pour l e fournir de poudre
de plomb , d ’armes à feu ; afin de l e rendre plus
redoutables aux ennemis .
D e plus , toute n ofl re ieuu e li e Fran çoil e , e l l en
de li e in d ’aller en traite , trouu er les N ations difper
fées , çà là , ils e fperen t d’en reuen ir chargez ,
des Gaitors de [ 151] p l ufieurs années .
E n vn mot , le pays n’e il pas depeupl é de Gaitors ,
ce font l es mines d ’or , l e s riche ll es ; qu’ il n ’y a
qu ’à pu il er dans les lacs , dans les ru i ll e au x : où il
y en a d ’autant plus , qu’on en a moins pris ces der
nieres années , craignant de s’écarter , d
’
e l l re prisdes Iroquois . Ces animaux d
’
ailleurs l e m u l tipl iau s
en grande abondance .
Pour ce qui c il de la fertilité des terres , elles fon t
icy de bon rapport . Les grains François y viennenth eureu l em en t : nous pouuon s en cel a , nous pali er
des l ecours de la Fräce , quelque nombre que nous
foyon s icy . P lus qu ’ il y aura d’
habitan s , plus ferons
nous dans l ’abondance .
Le be l l ail , les lards , font vu e douceur au pays ,
qu’
au trefois on [ 152 ] n’
ofoit e fperer . Le gibier yfoil onn e ; la cha li e des Orignaux , n
’
e it pas pour y
manquer .
Mais l ’anguille y e l l vu e manne , qui furpafi e tout
ce qu’
on en peut croire . L’
ex perien ce l’
in du l trie
nous y a rendus fi fçauan s , qu’en vu e feule nuit , vu
o u deux hommes , en prendront des cinq , fix mil
liers : cette pe l eb e dure deux mois entiers ; dont
o n fait prou ifion abondamment pour toute l’année
car l ’anguille e l l icy d ’
yne excellente garde , l oit
l echée au feu , l oit l a l èe : elles fon t beaucoupmeilleures , que toutes les anguilles de la France
La pc l che du S aumon , de l ’
E l l urgeon , y e l l tres
abondante en l a fail 0n . E t a vray dire , c’e l l icy , le
R oyaume des eaux des poi li ons .
Le pays e l l tres-fain , on y voit [ 153 ] fort peu demaladies . Les eu l aus y fon t tres-beaux , tres
faciles a e l euer . C ’e l t vu e ben cdiétion particuliere .
whether dried by fire or salted , and are much better
than any eels in France .
Salmon and Sturgeon are very plentiful in their sea
sons ; to tell the truth , this country Is the Kingdom
of water and of fish .
The country is very healthful , [ 153 ] remarkably
few diseases being seen here ; and children are
very comely and easy to rear . That is an especial
blessing .
CHAPITRE VI I I .
L A POR T E FE R MÉE A L’
E U A N GI L E , SE MBL E S’
OU U R IR
PL U S GRAN DE QU E IAMAIS .
E plus grand mal qu ’ait fait la guerre des
Iroquois , c’e l l d ’
auoir exterminé n os E gl ifes
n ailiau te s , de fol an t le pays des Hurons , dépeu
plant les nations A l gon qn in es ; fail an t mourir cruelle
ment les Paiteurs , le troupeau : em pe l chan t
qu ’on ne pall al l plus outre , aux N ations e l oign èes ,pour en faire vn peuple Chre il ien .
Maintenant,cette paix n ouue l l e , nous ouu rira vn
grand chemin, [ 154] vers les N ations fuperieure s ,
dont la guerre nous auoit cha lié . Le zele de n osP eres , les y porte defia auec amour , auec ioye ,comme au centre de leurs defirs .
Mais ce qui les anime dauan tage , ce qui fera vn
moyen bien pu i li au t , pour con ieru er la paix au ec les
Iroquois , c’e l t l
’
ouu erture que D ieu nous donne , pour
aller faire vu e R efiden ce au milieu du pays en n em y,
fur le grand lac des Iroquois , proche des On n on ta e
ron n on s . Le chemin en e l l tres—ai l é , n’y ayant que
deux cheutes d ’eau , où il faut mettre pied a terre ,faire vn portage qui n ’e l l pas long : où il feroit facile
de faire quelque petit reduit , pour auoir le commerce
libre , pour l e rendre m aiil res de ce grand lac :
d’
où par apres on peut aller aux Nations éloignées ,me lme [ 155] dans l
’ancien pays des Hurons ; fans
nous voir obligez a ces peines in con ceuabl es , que
L E S RE LA TION S D E S_] ÉS U I TE S [VOL . 40
nous auous pris autrefois , de porter canots,
bagage fur nos épaules , pour èu iter les precipices
d ’eau , les torrens im petueux , qui ne fon t pas
n au igabl es .
Les Iroquois On n on taeronn on s , nous inu iten t eux
m e lm cs , nous attirent par pre fen s : ils nous ont
defign é la place , nous en on t fait vn recit , commed
’
vu lieu le plus heureux qui l oit en toutes ces contrées . Il le fera , plus mille fois qu
’ ils ne le croyen t ,1] Dieu achene cét ouurage , fi les Anges tu te l airesdes peuples qui fon t à conu ertir , nous aident en ce
de liein . Car à vray dire , ce l eroit-là le cœur d’
vn e
terre,qui doit deuen ir fain te , puis qu
’elle e l l racheptée du l ang du Fils de [ 156] D ieu , qu ’il e l l temps
qu ’ il y l oit adoré . Nous demandons pour ce l u j et
des ouuriers , que nous attendons par le premier
embarquement .
'
RE LA TION OF 1652 —53
obliged to undergo those inconceivable fatigues of
former times , when we had to carry both canoes and
baggage on our shoulders in order to avoid the
waterfalls and im petuous lfloods which are un n avigable .
10
The On n on taeron n on Iroquois invite us of theirown accord , and solicit our coming by presents ;they have assigned a place to us , and have describedit to us as the fin est spot in all those regions . It
will be a thousand times more so than they think,if
God complete this work , and if the guardian Angelso f the peoples to be converted aid us in this proj ect .For , in truth , that spot would be the heart of a landdestined to become holy , since it has been ransomedwi th the blood of the S on of [ 156] God ,
and since itis time he were worshiped there . For this purpose
we ask for laborers , and we expect them by the firstship that sails .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
CHA PITR E DE RN IE R .
R E CU E IL T IR E D E D IU E R SE S L E TT R E S APPOR TÉE S D E
L A N OU U E L L E FRAN CE .
E païs des Hurons , qui n ourri li oit trente à trentecinq mille ames , dan s _
l’
e lt en duë de dix—fept à.
dix-huit lieues feulement , ayant cité pillé ,ruiné , bruflé : ceux qui fon t échappez de ce grand
naufrage , l e fon t retirez en diuerl cs Nations . Vn
bon nombre s ’eft venu ietter entre les bras des
Frâçois , notamment des Peres de n ofl re Compagnie ,qui les on t fi fortement fecouru s , qu ’on écrit , [ 157]qu ’ ils anc ient , cét E té dernier , enu iron trois cens
arpens de terre , en fem en cé de leurs bleds d ’
Inde ,
c ’e l l à dire , qu’ il a fallu abbattre trois cens arpes de
bois : pour faire cette grande ex pl an ade , tres-vt il e a
cette n ouue l l e Colonie , qui a m ain tenât dequoy l e
nourrir : mais n on pas encor dequoy l e couurir . Il
e l l vray, que Dieu qui a l oin des petits cyl eaux , ne
les a pas mis en oubly : car des perfon n e s de pietè ,de vertu , leurs ayans enuoyé , par aum o l n es , quel
ques couu erturcs , on les a diu ifèes en quatre : pour
couurir quatre petits orphelins de chacune . D’autres
fouhaittan s de faire porter leurs noms , à quelques
n ouueau x con u ertis , leur on t fait tenir quelques
pre fen s , qui on t ferny d’
habits , au pere , a la mere ,quelquefois a tous leurs en fan s .
[ 158] I’ay leu ce qui fuit , dans vu e lettre , écrite
par vue bonne Mere Vr l u l in e . Nous auou s appris ,
L E S R E L A TIONS D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
que n ofl re S em in arifl e Huronne , qui fut prife , il y a
enu iron dix ans , par les Iroquois : efl oit mariée enleur pays . Qu’elle e fl oit la m ailtre ll e dans l a cabane ,com pofèc de pl ufieurs familles . Qu
’elle prioit D ieu
tous les iours , qu ’elle le l al ioit prier par d ’autres :
ce qui paroiil d’autant plus efl onn an t , qu
’ elle n ’
auoit
qu’
en u iron treize , ou quatorze ans , quand elle fut
en l cuèe par ces Barbares . Nous auou s l a fœur en
n ofl re m aifon , qui e l l vn c ieun c veine , d ’
vn e mo
de l t ic rau ili an te , fort addon n èe à l ’orail on : elle en
fait tous les iours autant que les R e l igieufes : elle
e l l dans vn c pre fen ce de Dieu , quali continuelle :
l on e l prit e l l fi éclairé , fi rem ply de lumieres ,
[ 159] de raifon s , pour l'exercice de la vertu : qu ’on
void bien qu ’elle e ft gouu ern ée , par vn E l prit plus
haut , plus fubl im e , que l’
efprit humain .
Les pere , mere , de l’vue de nos S em in ari ll es
(que la pauure té , nous contraint , de tenir en vu fortpetit nombre) e l l ans venus voir leur fille , âgée d
’en
niron dix ans , luy dirent , que la paix l e fail an t auec
les Iroquois,ceux qu ’ il auoit connu en ce pays-l à , où
il auoit cité captif , l’
in uitoien t d ’y aller demeurer ,au ec toute l a famille : là-defiu s , ils luy deman
dereu t , fi elle ne l eroit pas bien ai l e d’
e l l re de la partie ,de fu iurc fou pere , l a mere . Comment donc ,
répondit-elle, n
’
c l l es-vous point honteux , de vouloir
quitter le pays de la priere , pour aller en vu lieu , où
vous fere z en danger , de [ 160] perdre la Foy? Ne
fçaue z-vous pas bien , que les Iroquois ne croyen t
pas en Dieu, qu
’
e itan s parm y eux , vous vinerez
comme eux ? Allez , fi vous voulez , en ce m iferabl epays : mais ie ne vous fu iuray pas , ie ne qu itteraylamais les filles l ain tes , fi vous m
’
aban don n e z . Ses
R E LA TION OF 1652 53
good Ursuline Mother We learned that ourHuron S eminarist , who was captured about ten years
ago by the Iroquois , was married in their country ;that she was the mistress in her cabin , which con
tain ed several families ; that she prayed to God everyday ; and that she induced others to pray to him .
This appears the more wonderful , as she was onlyabout thirteen or fourteen years old when she wascarried away by those Barbarians . We have in ourhouse her sister , who is a young widow of charming
modesty , and greatly given to prayer. She prays
every day , as long as do the Nuns themselves ; shelives almost constantly in the presence of God ; andher soul is so illuminated , and so filled with light
[ 159] and with motives for the exercise of virtue ,that , plainly , she is govern ed by a Spirit moreexalted and sublime than that of man .
The father and mother of one of our Seminarists
(our poverty compels us to maintain them in verysmall numbers) came to see their daughter , who was
about ten years old . They told her that , as peace
was being made with the Iroquois , those whom her
father had known in that country , where he had been
a captive , were inviting him to go and dwell there
with all his family ; and , thereupon , they asked herwhether she would not like to be one of the party
and follow her father and mother . What ?’ she
rejoined ; are you not ashamed to wish to leave the
country of prayer , and go to a place where you will
be in danger of [ 160] losing the Faith ? Are you notwell aware that the Iroquois do not believe in God,and that , being among them , you will live as they
do ? Go , if you will , to that wretched country , but I
shall not follow you ; I will never leave the holy
L E S RE L A TION S D E S j E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
parens , hon oran s fon courage , l’
aflureren t qu ’ ils ne
s’
él oign eroien t pas de la m aifon de priere .
Les faints Peres , parl an s de la cha l l etè , la font
pali er, pour vn c vertu de l cen duë des Cieux : pour
vu e beauté , inconnue à la nature : pour l ’
vn e des
plus belles filles , ou de s plus beaux fruits de la grace .
Ce fruit commence à paroi l l re , dans les vergersde ces n ouue l l es E gl ifes . I
’
apprcnds qu’
vn ienne
H uron , âgé d’
enu iror‘
1 trente ans , fortement fol l icité ,depuis [ 161] quatre ans , de l e marier : a toûj ours
refil l è . E nfin , comme l es proches , le pre li oien t
extraordinairement,par des con fideration s pu ilian tes
il alla trouuer l’
vn des P eres , qui on t l oin de cette
E gl ife ,luy dit ce peu de paroles . Mon P ere ,
on me dit tous les iours , marie toy ; quelle e l l ta
pen fée ? determine moy . Le Pere luy repartit , qu ’
il
n’
e l l oit pas defendu de l e marier : qu’
il le pouuoit
faire . Oiiy,mais repart le ienne homme , lequel des
deux e l l plus agreable à D ieu ; de l e marier , ou de
ne l e pas marier ? Le P ere luy répondit , que ceux
qui ren on çoien t aux pl aifirs de la terre , pour mieux
l eru ir IE SVS -CHR IST , 1ny e l l oien t plus agreable .
C ’e l l all ez , replique ce bon Neophyte , il ne faut plus
me parler de mariage . [ 162 ] Adieu mon P ere , ie
n’
auois que ce mot a te dire .
Le P ere , qui nous a fait part de cèt entretien ,
adj 0u ite ,qu ’ayant
,certain iou r , rencontré vn c vel ue
all ez ienne , venant du trauail : luy dit , la voyant fort
mal ve l l u ë , marchant pieds nuds , à caul e de l a
pauure té .Ieanne
, (c’e l l le nom qu
’elle a reccu ë au
Bapte fm e) la peine que tu prends , pour nourrir tespanures en fan s , me fait croire , que tu l erois bien
l ou l agée , fi tu prenois quelque bon mary , qui te
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
l ecourût . La panure femme répondit par les yeux,
verfan t beaucoup de larmes . Helas , fit-elle , où trou
ueray-ie vn mary , fem bl abl e à ce l uy que i
’
ay perdu ?
Il faut con fe li er , luy dit le Pere , que c’
e il oit vngrand homme de bien : mais il n ’
e l t pas im poflibl e
d’
en trouu er vn l em bl abl e , qui te [ 163 ] l ecoure autant
que ce luy que D ieu t’
auoit donné . Il n ’ importe,
répond-elle , ie ne veux pas me remarier . Il y a
long—temps , que i’
aurois vefcu comme fœur , auec
mon mary , fi on m’ eut permis de faire ma volonté .
Le defir que i ’
ay de me l auu er , m’
èl oigu e du mari
age . Ouy, mais tu ne l aili cras pas de te fauuer
c itant mariée ? Il e ll vray : mais ie ne l erois pas fi
agreable a I E S V S - C H R I S T . Luy as-tu promis , dene te plus remarier ? non pas : mais i ’ay de li e in la
premiere fois que ie me com m un ieray, de luy dire
ces paroles . Mon Dieu , ie renonce aux pl aifirs du
mariage . l e prefere ton pl aifir au mien . Lespl aifirs d
’icy bas fon t courts , ceux du Ciel fon t
e tern e l s . Ceux qui ne gonfl ent pas , les bons l entimens des S aunages , [ 164] diront que ce l uy
-cy, vient
p l u to l l de l’
e fprit de D ieu , que de l’
e l prit d’
vu
Saunage .
Comme les bons arbres , produ il en t de bons frui6ts
cette gen ereu l e Chre il ienn e a vu e fille , qui fu it l es
fain tes inclinations de l a bonne mere . Cette enfant
demeure au ec les R e l igieu l es h0l pita l icres , l eruan t
d’
In terprete aux panures Hurons malades ; dont il y
en a en bon nombre toute l’année , dans cette m aifon
de m ifericorde . E lle a l ’e l prit fi bon , qu’
elle a
appris en moins de deux ans , la langue Fran çoil e ,
en l u itte ,à lire à écrire : en forte , qu
’
elle deuan ce
les petites Fran çoil es . E lle e l l d’
vu fi bon naturel ,
R E LA TION OF 1652 53
makes me think that thy lot would be much lighter
il thou wouldst take some good husband to helpthee .
’ The poor woman made answer with her eyes ,shedding many tears . Alas ! said she ; where
shall I find a husband like the on e I have lost ? ’
It
must be admitted ,’ replied the Father , that he was
a very excellent man ; but it is not impossible to findon e like him , to [ 163 ] aid thee as much as di d he
whom God had given thee .
’
It makes no diff er
ence ,’ she answered ; I am determined n ot to marry
again . If I had been permitted to do as I wished , I
would , long ago , have lived with my husband as a
sister . R egard for my salvation estranges me fromthe thought of marriage .
’
Yes , but wilt thou not
be saved just the same , even if thou art married ? ’
It is true , but I would n ot be so acceptable to
E S U S C H R I S T Hast thou promised him n ot to
marry again ? ’ No ; but I intend , the first time I
receive communion , to say these words to him : MyGod , I renounce the pleasures of marriage . I prefer
thy pleasure to my own . The pleasures here below
are short ; those of Heaven are Those
who take no delight in the S avages ’ good impulses ,
[ 164] will say that this on e was rather inspired by
the spirit of God than that it originated in the mind
of a S avage .
As good trees bring forth good fruit , this nobleChristian woman has a daughter who inherits the
holy inclinations of her good mother . This child
lives with the hospital Nuns,acting as Interpreter
for the poor Huron patients, of whom there has
been a goodly number all the year in that house of
mercy . She is so intelligent that she mastered the
French language in less than two years ; and then
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL . 40
que lamais elle ne s’
e x cu l e , dans la correct ion de l espetits de fi auts : fi on accu l e que l qu
’
vn e [ 165] de
l e s compagnes , elle dit , pour l’ordinaire
,que c
’
e ft
e lle qui a fait la faute : qu ’elle n ’a point d ’
e l prit .
Il n ’y a pas long-temps , qu’elle a fait l a premiere
Communion ; pour prenne , qu’elle con n oili oit
ce l uy qui la ven oit vifiter , elle s’
offrit d ’ elle-me lme
à luy , le fupp l ian t de la retenir en l a m aifon ,de
Iuy faire la grace d’
e ftre R e l igieu l e . E lle a vu e fi
forte creance , qu ’ il luy accordera cette faneur , qu’elle
ne veut iam ais fortir du Mon a l l ere , où elle e l l : pouraller voir l a bonne mere
,l e s parens , qui ne fon t
qu ’à deux lieues de Quebec . E t s ’ ils la viennent
voi r , elle a fi peur , qu’ ils ne luy parlent , de mettre
le pied hors de cèt H o l pital , qu’elle les e x pedie en
quatre paroles . Ce qui e l l peu ordinaire à desen fan s : mais [ 166] ce l uy qui dôn e le poids aux
veu s , qui l e p l ail l dans l’ innocence , rend leurs
cœurs l ol ides , leurs langues dil ertes , quand il luy
p l ai l l .
D il on s en pall ant , puis que nous parlons de l’
H of
pital , ce que i’
ay leu dans vn bout de lettre , qu’
vn
Saunage fort opin iail re ,fort éloigné de la Foy,
ayant cité porté en cette m aifon de D ieu , pour y e l l re
pen l è , fut fi furpris , fi e l l on n è , voyant la douceur ,la bonté , la m odeftie , la charité de ces bonnes
Meres,qu ’ il ne fail oit autre cho l e , que de reïterer
ces paroles ; Mais , que pretendent ces filles , qu’
at
tendent—elles de ces malades qui n’ont rien ? elles
dôn en t leurs viure s , leurs moyes , leur trauail , au e c
tant de bonté , on ne leur donne rien ! Il faut [ 167]b ien
,qu ’elles e fperen t d
’autres biens , apres cette
vie ? ces pen fées l iquefieren t ce cœur de fer , qui l e
L E S RE L A TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
rendit , s ’e l l ant fait Chre il ien , il fit paroi l l re ,que
la charité e fl oit vn bon P redicateur .
Mais pour dire encor deux mots de la pureté , qui
s’
e l l abl it dans quelques ames d ’élite . Vn e autre
ienne veu fue , paroiil fi retirée , depuis la mort de
fou mary , que me lme , elle ne répond aucun mot aux
hommes , qui l eroien t capables de luy parler de mari
age . Le Pere , qui a l oin de fou ame , en voulantfçauoir la rail on : elle la rendit en ces termes . Il y
a long-temps , que l’
ay promis à Dieu , que iam ais
p lus ie ne m e m arierois . C ’ e lt pour l on honneur ,n on pour m on contentement , ce que i
’en l ay. C ’e l t
a ll ez ve l cu auec les [ 168] hommes , ay-j c dit en moy
me lme : l e fçay bien que je l uis encor ienne , que
ie l uis capable d’
auoir des eu l aus , qui l eroien t mon
l outien : ie me prine volontiers de cèt appuy . Il
n ’ importe que ie fois pauure : mais il importe que
i’
aym e Dieu . Ie n ’ay qu’
vn e petite fille , c’e l l m on
e nfant vn ique : i’
ay dit fouue n t a N oil re Seigneur ,la voila : fi tu me la veux c iter , ie ne l ai li eray pas
de t ’
aym er : ie ne fouhaite l a vie que pour te l eru ir .
Qu ’on en die ce que l ’
on voudra , ce langage ducœur , e l l e l oqu cn t denaut D ieu . Si quelques hommes
ne le gonfl ent pas , quantité d’
A nges y prennent
p l aifir .
Voicy vn c deuotion bien innocente . Quelques
femmes Huronnes , fon t entrées dans vn combat , à
qu i rendroit plus d’honneur [ 169] à la fain te Vierge ,
par leur bonne vi e , par les prieres qu ’elles luy
adrefloien t , notamment en recitan t fon Chapelet . Il
y en a telle , qui s’
endorm an t l’
A ue Ma r ia en la
bouche,la continué a l ou rèue il , comme fi le l om m eil
n e l’
auoit point interrompue. E t afin que le nombre
RELA TION OF 1652—53
ness ; and they are given nothing in return ! They
must [ 167] certainly hope for other blessings after
this life . These thoughts melted that heart of
iron,and it yielded ; and , becoming a Christian , he
made it evident that charity was a good P reacher .
But,— to say a word or two more regarding the
purity that has been implanted in some elect souls ,another young widow has become so reticent since
her husband ’ s death , that she does not even answer
those men who,perchance , might address her on
the subject of marriage . When the Father who hasthe care of her soul wished to know the reason of
this , she gave it to him as follows : A long timeago I promised God that I would never marry again .
It is in his honor , and not for my own pleasure , that
I act thus . E nough of living with [ 168] men ! said
I to myself . I am well aware that I am still young ,and that I could have children who would be my
dependence ; but I voluntarily deny myself that
support . Whether or not I be poor matters not ; butit is of importance whether I love God or not . I
have only a little daughter ; she is my sole child . I
have often said to Our Lord : There she is : if it bethy will to take her from me , I shall not cease to
love thee ; I wish her to live only that she may servethee .
’ Say what you will , this language of the
heart is eloquent before God . If there are men who
do not appreciate it , there are many Angels who takepleasure in it .
The following is an instance of devotion of a very
innocent kind . Some Huron women joined in a con
test as to who should pay the greatest honor [ 169]to the blessed Virgin
,both by exemplary living
,and
by addressing prayers to heu - and this especially by
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
de fois qu’
elles le difen t , l oit honorable a leur bonne
Mere : elles mettent à chaque fois , vue de leurs
perles , ou de leurs diam an s à part ; ce font leursgrains de porcelaine . E lles apportent tous les Di
manches , au P ere qui les conduit,le petit amas
qu’
elles ont fait pendant la fem ain e : afin de tirer de
ce m agafin , dequoy faire vn c Couronne , vn c
E charpe , à la façon du pays , à l’image de la fain te
Vierge . Le Pere a marqué dans vn papier , [ 170]qu ’ il s ’ e l t trouué cinq mille de ces perles , depuis
l’
A li om ption , iniques au quinzième d’
Oët0bre . Ie
m’
a liure , que tous ceux qui fon t en rol e z en la
Con frairie du R o l aire , ne recitcu t pas fi fouuen t leur
Chapelet , que ces bonnes Neophytes .
Il faudroit maintenant parler de la R efiden ce de
faint Iofeph a S illery . D e la R efidcn ce des T rois
R iu ieres . D e la Mi ll ion de fain te Croix à T adou fi ac .
De la Mi lli on de S . Iean e n la nation des Porcs-E pics .
D e la Mi ll ion des Poi li ons blancs . D e la Mill i on desA bn aqu iois . Des peuples appe l l e z les N ipifirin ien s ;les Pisk itang : les Algonquins de la petite Nation ,autres
,qu ’on a commencé d ’
in fl ru irc en la foy : mais
ie n ’ay pas all ez d ’
in l l ru étion pour parler en [ 17 1]détail de tous ces peuples de toutes ces Nations .
l e rapporteray quelque petite cho l e , de ce qui e l l
venu entre mes mains .
Vn e femme , nommée Gen eu iefue , ayant vu fils
malade, âgé d
’
enu iron huit à neuf ans , fit tout fon
po lfibl e ,pour luy faire re couure r la fauté , ou pour . l e
difpofer à vu e fain te mort , en cas que Dieu le voulutretirer de ce monde . E lle fol l icitoit les R e l igi eu l es
H o l pita l ieres , les Vr l u l in e s , de prier in ce li am m en t
pour luy : E lle im portun oit fouuen t nos Peres , les
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
priant de le vifiter , de le fortifier : en vu mot,
de faire en forte , qu’ il allait droit au Ciel , fan s
rien rencontrer en l on chemin qui l ’
arre l l at . E lle
auoit cette pe n fée en l’
e fprit , que D ieu fol l icité par
les prieres de l es amis , touché [ 172 ] de com pafiion ,
à la vene des bonnes difpofition s de fou enfant , luy
ren droit la fauté , ou s’ il le vou l oit appeller à icy,
qu ’ il le de l iuroit , d es peines qu'on l ou lfre pour
l ’ordinaire , apres la mort . Ce motif luy don n01t vn
foin fi violent , de l ’ame , du corps de cèt enfant
fort innocent , qu ’elle l e rendoit importune à tout lemonde , a l ou fils m e lm c : 1ny demandant , s
’il n ’ou
b l ioit rien en l es Con fefiion s , s ’ il auoit douleur de
l e s pe che z . Ce panure enfant , luy dil oit par fois ,ne vous attri l te z point , ma mere , m on cœur n
’
e l t pas
méchant , il n’y a rien qui le pul li e ga ll er : l ’ay dit
au P ere , tout ce qu’ il y auoit de manuais . Or comme
la maladie augm en toit tous les iours : Quelques Ion
gl eurs , ou Medecins du pays , parens [ 17 3 ] de la merede cèt enfant , luy dirent , qu
’ils trouu eroicn t bien le
moyen de gu erir le malade . E lle fit au commence
ment la l ourde oreille : voyant bien , qu’
ils l e vou
l oien t l eruir de leurs fuper l l ition s , de leurs
badineries ordinaires : mais enfin , l e voyant pre li èe ,
le grand amour , qu’elle auoit pour la fauté de fou
fils,qui e fl oit l on enfant vn ique , la fit dilfim u l er , à
demy conde fcen dre à leurs vo l on te z . Ils abordent
doucement cèt enfant , luy demandent s’ il ne l eroit
pas bien ai l e de gue rir : il répond qu’
ouy ; il faut
donc,repartent-ils , que vous permettiez qu
’
on vous
chante,qu’on dre li e vn Tabernacle , pour con fu l ter
les Genies de l ’air , touchant vo ltre mal . Non pas
cela,dit-il
,non pas cela . E t l e tournant [ 174] vers
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
this world . S he begged the Hospital and UrsulineNuns to pray for him without ceasing ; she often
importuned our Fathers , asking them to visit him , to
strengthen him , and , in short , to take such measures
a s would insure for him a straight path to Heaven
without encountering any obstacle on the way . She
thought that God, solicited by the prayers of his
friends , and touched [ 172 ] with compassion at the
sight of her son ’s good qualities , would restore him
to health ; or that , if it were his will to call him to
himself , he would exempt him from the pains that
are ordinarily suffered after death . This ideainspired her with such excessive solicitude for both
the soul and the body of that innocent child , that
she rendered herself troublesome to every one ,and even to her son , whom she would question
whether he were forgetting anything in his Con fessions , and whether he were sorry fOr his sins . That
poor child would say to her sometimes : D o not
grieve , mother ; my heart is n ot wicked , there is
nothing that can spoil it ; and I have told the Fathera l l that was evil in it . Now , as the illness increased
every day , some j ugglers , the Physicians of the
country , relatives [ 173 ] of this child’ s mother, told
her that they would infallibly find a remedy to cure
the patient . A t first she turned a dea l ear to their
words , seeing plainly that they wished to employ
their superstition s rites and customary buffooneries ;but at last , seeing herself hard pressed , her great
desire to restore her son to health— he was her only
child— caused her to dissemble , and partially tocomply with their wishes . They softly approached
the child , and asked him if he would not be glad to
become well again ; he replied that he would . You
L E S RE LA TIONS D E S [ E S U I TE S [von 40
l a mere , il s’
écrie , l e ne veux point aller en E nfer .
Ces chol es fon t de lfenduës : en vu mot , il fit voir ,par ge l l es , par paroles , qu
’ il abhorroit toutes ces
fuper l l ition s : mais comme ce u’
e ftoit qu’
vn enfant ,qu ’ il perdoit l e s forces , l a vigueur , ces Iongl eurs
pa li eren t outre . Ils luy pendent au col , trois petits
rondeaux faits de brins de porc-epic de la grandeur
d’
vu petit ietton , di l ans que l on mal caché dans les
in te ltin s , e fl oit de me lme grandeur , qu ’ il le fa l l oit .
faire l ortir . Ils 1ny dem an doien t foign eu iem en t , S’
il
ne voyoit rien dans l es fonge s . au qu e l s tous ces
Barbares ont grande creance . Il répondit , qu’ il auoit
veu vn canot . Anih -toit , ou luy en fit faire vn petit ,qui luy fut apporté
,afin de contenter le genie
,ou
[ 17 5] le Demon des fonges . R emarquez que tout
cela l e fail oit en cachette , dans la profondeur de la
nuit , de peur que les P eres , n’ en en li ent conn oili an ce .
E nfin comme ces remedes n’
auoien t aucun effet , l e s
Iongl eurs prennent leurs tambours , ils hurlet , ils
chantent , ils foufll en t le malade , ils font fe l l in d’
vu
chien roux , pour arrefter le cours de l a maladie : mais
au lieu de fou l ager ce panure enfant , l a fièvre
redouble au ec vn c telle vehemence , qu’ il s ’
écrie , qu’ il
brûle , qu’ il l ent defia le feu de l ’
E n fer , qu'on le
tu ë . A ces cris , ces beaux medecins l e retirent , lamere épouuan tèe , ouure les yeux , pali e le refl e de la
nuit en pleurs , en larmes , tran l percèe de douleur ,d
’
auoir donné quelque creance à ces charlatans , à
ces trompeurs .
[ 176] Le P ere qui a l oin de ce quartier, arriuan tle matin , pour voir le malade : cette panure femme ,l ’aborde , luy dit en pleurant . Mon Pere , allons
à la Chapelle , l e dcfire de m e con fe li er : à peine y
L E S R E LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
fut-elle entrée , qu’elle l e ie tte par terre , verfan t
quantité de larmes , pouffant tout haut ces paroles
entrecoupées de l angl ots . C’
e fl moy qui l ay mourir
m on fils . Ce fon t mes peches qui luy c itent la vie .
C’
e l l moy qui le tu ë . l e l uis coupable , il e ll inno
cent . l e merite la mort ; il merite de viure , fut-il
ain fi , que ie mourull e , non pas luy : car il e l l bon ,ie l uis m e l chan te . I ’ay l aché ce l uy qui a tout fait ,
que l eray—ie pour l ’
appail er ? l e tournant vers lePere , elle tire vn grand collier de porcelaine de fou
ic in , luy dit , voila pour appail er [ 177] ce l uy que
l’
ay fa l ché , offre luy ce pre l en t par les mains des
pauures : prie pour moy m on P ere , afin que mes
pechès , ne l oien t point imputés , à mon enfant :que la porte du Ciel , ne luy l oit point fermée . l e
luy preparois vn c belle robe de cail or , ie te l’
appor
teray mon P ere , tu la penderas en quelque lieu ,dedans l ’
E gl il e : elle parlera pour m oy, fera voir
a tout le monde , m on peché , ma repentance .
E nfin l on panure petit E l tien n e , c’e l l ainfi qu Il
s’
appe l l oit , mourut fain dt em en t . Cette panure mere
le bail an t apres l a mort , luy dil oit , pardonne moy
m on fils,c ’e l t moy qui t
’ay l ay mourir par mes
peches , pardonne à ta mere , elle a pent-eitre , l a ly ta
panure [ 178] ame , permettant ces fotifes , ces
fupe r l tition s , fur ton petit corps . l e crains que cela
ne t ’
em pc fche ,l ’entrée du Paradis . E t le voulant ,
elle-me lme en ieue l ir , elle 1ny ioign it l es deux petites
mains,comme s ’ il eut prié D ieu : mettant l on Chap
pelet à l ’entour , fon petit C rucifix entre l es doigts .
Voila mon fils,luy dil oit -elle , l
’ image de ce l uy qui a
n ctoyè tes pechés . C ’eil luy qui te logera dans l a
m aifon , où iam ais plus tu ne pourras mourir .
RE LA TION OF 1652—53
arrived in the morning to see the patient , this poor
woman accosted him , and thus addressed him with
tears : Father , let us go to the Chapel ; I wish to
be confessed .
”S carcely had she arrived there , when
she threw herself on the ground , shedding many
tears and exclaiming aloud , her words interrupted
by sobs : I am making my son die . My sins aretaking away his life ; I am killing him . I am guilty ,and he is innocent . I deserve death , and he deserves
to live . Would I could die in his stead ; for he is
good , an d I am wicked . I have displeased him who
made all things . What shall I do to conciliate
him ? And,turning to the Father , she drew from
her bosom a large porcelain collar , and said to him :
T hat is to appease [ I 77] him whom I have off ended .
Off er him this present through the poor . P ray for
me , my Father , in order that my sins may not be
imputed to my child , and the door of Heaven be
closed against him . I was making him a fine beaver
skin robe ; I will bring it to thee , Father , and thou
shalt bang it som ewhere inside the Church . It will
speak for me , and show to every one my sin and my
repentance .
Finally , her poor little E stienne — for that was his
name — died a holy death . The poor mother kissed
him after his death , and said to him : Forgive me,
my son ; it is I who made thee die by my sins . For
give thy mother ; she has perhaps defil ed thy poor
[ 178] soul by permitting those foolish and supersti
tion s rites to be performed over thy little body . I
fear that may prevent thy entrance into Paradise .
And , wishing to bury him herself , she j oined his
little hands as if in prayer to God , winding his
R osary about them and placing his little Cru cifix
L E S R ELA TION S D E S [ E S U I TE S [VOL. 40
Voicy vu e grace bien particuliere arriuée , a vue
bande de bons Chre il ien s , qui vogu oien t fur le grand
fleuue , fur la fin de l’
H yu er . Les glaces les entourans de tous co l l ez , l e j e ttan s les vues fur les
autres : en forte [ 179] qu’ ils ne voyoien t aucun moyen
d’
e l chapper , attendan s à tous m om en s vn debris , de
leur petit vaili eau : le P ere qui les accom pagn oit ;
voyant bien que fans vn l ecours du Ciel , c’
e il oit fait
de leurs vi es : les fit mettre en priere . Chol e c itrange ,vous eufii és dit , que leur orail 0n écartoit ces grands
corps de glaces , les fail oit fuir , pour leur donner
pa l l age : le coup fut fi l oudain , qu’ il les e l ton na tous .
E t pour marque , que c’
e l toit vu e faneur e x traordi
naire , l’eil et fut grand pour leurs ames , anil i bien
que pour leurs corps , dau tan t que ce prodige , les
rendit plus fermes à la Foy,augmenta fortement
leur confiance en D ieu .
Ce qui fu it n ’e l l pas moins [ 180] étonnant . Vn
Chre il ien malade à la mort , fut prié , l ol l icité ,
pre li è , par l es parens , par l es amis , de l e l aiii cr
pen ie r à la façon des S auuages : c’e l t à dire , auec
des cris , des hurl em en s , des tambours , dont l e l er
u en t les Iongl eurs , croyan s par ce tintamarre , épou
uan ter l e Manitou , qui c ite la vie aux hommes . Ce
bon N eophyte les rebuta , difau t , qu’il aym oit mieux
mourir , que de l ou ffrir ces badineries , ces fuperfl i
tions,plus propres à faire mourir vn malade , qu
’
à le
guerir : mais comme il vid , que ces Iongl eurs , l e
difpo l oien t à le foufler , mal -gré l es refil täces , il l e
icru it du peu de force qui 1ny re il oit , pour l ortir de
la cabane,pour l e traiin er dans le bois . Cho l e
c itrange ame l ure [ 18 1] qu’ il s ’éloigne de ces S orciers ,
il s ’approche de la fan tè : en forte qu ’ il fut guery
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UI TE S [VOL. 40
quafi en vu in l tan t , auec vn c ioye de fou cœur,
vn étonnement de tous ceux qui le ten oien t pourmort .
Ce qu e ie vay dire , e it digne d’
eftre fceu . D eux
ieun es filles Chre il ien n es , l e voyan s pourfu iuies , par
deux ieun es hommes , l e ietten t dans les fore ll s , qui
couuren t ce grand pays : elles coururent fi fort ,en treren t fi auan t , dans ce pays perdu : qu
’ elles furent
deux mois fan s paroil l re . On les cherche , on les
appelle , point de n ouu e l l es , la peur les auoit fi bien
éloignées qu ’on les ten oit pour mort es : car n’
ayât
porté aucun viure , auec elles , chacun croyoit , que la
faim les auroit égorgées . [ 182 ] E nfin apres auoir*
bien couru , bien marché dans ces grands bois , elles
l e trouu eren t fur les rines , de la grand’
R iu iere de
S . Laurens , où ayant apperceu vn valli can François ,qui m on toit a T adcu li ac , elles appe l l eren t , firent
figue , qu’on les embarquait , ce qui fut fait .
Bref elles arriu eren t en bonne fauté au logis de
leurs parens : n’
ayau s ve l cu , tout ce temps-l à , que
de racines,de petits fruict s S aunages , qu ’
elles trou
noient dans les bois . N on in [ ol a pan e viu it homo , cesparoles
, pouuoien t e itre pri l es au pied de la lettre àleur égard .
Vn e autre ienne fille , ne l e ietta pas dans ce
danger,mais elle y ietta vn impudent qui la prefloit
[ 18 3 ] aue c violence : car prenant vn cou l teau en main ,elle luy a l l oit planter dans la gorge , ou dans le fein ,fi l a mere accourant , n
’eut retenu fon bras .
Le P ere qui a c ité en Mi ll ion dans le lac de S .
Iean ,dit
, qu’
vn e fille le vint prier , de luy donner leB apte fm e . Il luy demande , fi que l qu
’
vn de nos
Peres, l
’
auoit in ftru ite ; elle dit que non , qu’
elle
RELA TION OF 1652—53
preparing to blow upon him despite his opposition ,he made use of the little strength left him to go forthfrom his cabin and drag himself into the woods .
Strange to relate , the farther [ I 8 I ] he went from those
S orcerers , the nearer he came to health , so that he
was cured almost in a moment , to the delight of
his heart,and the astonishment of all those who
considered him as dead .
What I am about to relate is worthy of publication .
Two young Christian girls , seeing themselves pursued by two young men , fled into the forests whichcover this great country . They ran so hard , and
penetrated so far into that wild region , that they
were not seen again for two months . P eople searched
and shouted for them , but there was no news of
them . Fear had driven them so far away that theywere accounted dead ; for, as they had taken no foodwith them , all believed that hunger must havecaused their death . [ 182 ] At length , after they had
run and walked a long distance in those vast forests ,they found themselves on the bank of the great R iverSt . Lawrence , where , perceiving a French vesselthat was on its way up to Tadoussac , they hailed it
and made signs to be taken aboard , which was done .
In brief,they arrived in good health at their
parents ’ lodge,having lived all that time on nothing
but roots and small Wild fruits that they found in
the woods . N on in solopa ne vivit hom o, these words
admitted of a literal interpretation in their case .
Another young girl exposed to a like danger notherself , but au impudent fellow who was importuning
her [ 18 3 ] with violence . Taking a knife in her hand ,she was about to plant it in his throat or in his breast ,had not her mother ran up and stayed her arm .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL. 40
n ’a iam ais veu , de gens faits comme nous , portafis
des robes noires : mais qu ’elle a demeuré auec des
Chre il ien s , qui luy ont appris à prier D ieu , qui
luy on t fait conn oi l l re l ’importance du B aptefm e .
Le Pere voyant l a candeur , fon zele , l on afliduitè ,
l a per l eueran ce à demander cette grace , ne luy o l a
r efu l cr . On a accordé cette me lme faneur à enu iron
[ I 84] vu e centaine de S aunages , de ceux qui trafiqu en t
ordinairement en ce quartier-là .
L E S RELA TIONS D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
Ex traiët du Priuilege du Roy.
A R Grace Priu il ege du R oy donné a Paris ,fign é C R A M O I S Y , il e l l permis à S E B A ST 1 E N C R AMO 1 sY , Marchand Libraire Iuré
e n l’
Vn iverfitè de Paris , Imprimeur ordinaire du
R oy de la R eyne , Bourgeois , ancien E icheu iu ,
ancien Inge Con fu l de cette Ville de Paris , d ’ imprimer
ou faire imprimer vn Liure intitulé , R el a tion de ce qui
s’
e/t paf?! en l aMi/3‘ion des Peres de la Compagn ie de IE SVS ,
a u P ays de la N ouuel l e France , Es a nnées 1652 . 1653 .
enuoyëe a u R . P . P rouincia ! de la P rou ince de France ,
ce pendant le temps efpace de neuf années con fe
cutiue s , aue c defen ies à tous Libraires Imprimeurs
d ’ imprimer ou faire imprimer ledit Liure , fous pret exte de dègu il em en t , ou changement qu
’ils y pour
rcicn t faire , à peine de con fil caticu , de l ’amende
portée par ledit Priuil ege .
Ex tract from the Royal License .
Grace and License of the King , given at Parisand signed C R A M 0 1 s Y permission is
given to S E B A S T I E N C R A M O I S Y , Bockseller under Oath in the University of Paris
,and
Printer in ordinary to the King and Queen , Citiz en ,former Alderman , and former j udge—Consul of this
City of Paris , to print cr cause to be printed a Book
entitled,R el a tion de ce qu i s
’
est passé en l a Mission desP eres de la Compagn ie de j E SU S , a u P ays de la N ouvel le
Fra nce , e'
s a nnées 1652 . et 1653 envoyée a u R . P . P ro
vincia l de l a P rovince de Fra nce . And this during thetime and space of nine consecutive years , forbidding
all Booksellers and P rinters to print or cause to be
printed the said Book , under pretext of any disguise
or change that they might make therein , under
penalty of confiscation and of the fine provided by
the said License .
L E S RE LA TION S D E S [ E S UITE S [VOL . 40
Perm ilfion du R . P. Prouincial .
OVS F R A N Ç O I S A N N A T Prou in cial de l a
Compagnie de I E S V S en la Prouin ce de
France , auou s accordé au fleur S E B A S T I E N
C R AMO 1 s Y Marchand Libraire Iurè en l’
Vn iucrfité
de Paris , Imprimeur ordinaire du R oy de la
R eyne , Bourgeois , ancien E cheuin ancien Inge
Con fu l de cette Ville de Paris , l’
im preflion des R ela
tions de la N ouuel l e France . Fait à Paris ce 10.
Feurier 1654 .
FRAN Ç O IS AN N AT .
B IBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA : VOL. XL
LXXX I I I
For a bibliographical account of this document ,see Vol . XXXVI I I .
LXXX IV
In presenting the text of the R el a tion of 1652 53
(Paris , we follow the original Cramoisy edi
tion,from the copy in the Lenox Library . The
prefatory epistle of the superior , François le Mercier ,is dated on p . 4 ,
! A Quebec ce 2 9. d’
Octobre
The Priu il ege” is n ot dated ; but the P erm iflion ,
signed by the Provincial , François Annat , was Faità Paris ce 10 . Feurier This annual is no . 10 1 ,
in H arrisse’
s N otes .
Col la tion : Title , with verso blank , 1 leaf ; Table
des Chapitres , pp . prefatory epistle from LeMercier to the Provincial , pp . I -
4 ; text (9 chaps .)pp . 5— 184 ; E x traict du Priu il ege du R oy, withverso blank , 1 leaf ; Perm iflion du R . P . Pronin
cial ,” with verso blank , 1 leaf . S ignatures : 51 in two ,
A — L in eights , M in two , N in four .In the Harvard copy , line 17 of p . 13 2 ends withde , and line 18 begins with the same word . This
duplication is removed in the Lenox copy . On p . 159l in e 15, of the Harvard copy , we find l a- famille ;but in the Le nox copy it is corrected to
l a famille . The Harvard copy is , therefore ,apparently , the earlier impression .
BIBLIOGRAPH ICAL D A TA : VOL . XL
Copies of this R ela tion have been sold cr priced asfollows : H arrasscwitz no . 3 7 , priced at 120
marks ; O’
Ca l l aghan no . 12 3 3 , sold to Libraryof Parliament of Canada for 8 15, and had cost him a
like amount ; Barlow no . 1303 , sold for
Du fossé , priced , at diff erent times , between 189 1
1893 , at 2 00 and 265 francs . Copies are to be found
in the following libraries : Lenox , Harvard , Brown(private), Marshall (private), Ayer (private), St . Mary
’ s
College (Montreal), Laval University (Quebec),Library of Parliament (Ottawa), British Museum , and
Bibliothèque Nationale (Paris).
N O TE S TO VOL . XL
rem en t is apparen tly a l ap su s ca l am i for en l eu em en t , in the lightof Ponce t
’
s m en tion of the child ’
s death am ong the Iroquois .
8 (p. In teresting contem porary docum en ts regardingCanadian a ffa irs at this juncture are the letters ofMarie de l ’Iuca rn ation . Writing from Quebec , A ug. 30. 1653 . she m en tion s P on ce t
’
s
capture . and the siege of Three R ivers by the Iroquois ; and adds :B ut the reverend Father Mercier , superior of m ission s , has so for
tified this place that the French people here are safe . Thosewretches have so devasta ted these districts thatwe have som etim es
be lieved thatwe wou ld be obliged to re tu rn to France . N owthe harvests , which are abundan t , are be ing gathered . W1th that ,too , a id is com ing from Fran ce , which is a con solation to a l l the
people ; for it wou ld have been deplorable if m a tters had com e to
the extrem ity of abandon ing the coun try. More than Frenchsettlers , who have m ade grea t ou tlays in order to establish themselves here , wou ld be de stitute , having no property e lsewhere .
In another letter ,— dated 1653 (m on th and day n ot given ), and
addressed to the U rsu line superior a t Tou rs , Mother Marie m akesa statem en t o f especial in terest , in view of the credit given by m ost
historian s tc Fron tenac for plann ing the erection of the fort whichbore h is nam e : A t presen t , a peace is be ing n egotiated ; and thereis ta lk of sending Gospe l laborers to establish a grea t m ission at
On ta rio . which is ten days ’ jcum cy above Mon treal. It is in tendedto take soldiers there a lso , and to bu ild a fort , in order to m ake theplace secu re ,
— becau se , as that post will be in the m ids t of severa lim portan t tribes , it will be a resort for those who shall go to
announce the Gospel. ”T he nam e On tario was not , as far as is known , applied at that
early date to any fixed settlem en t , whether of French or Indians ;bu t the lake — otherwise known as L ac des Iroquois , L ac S t. L ou is ,
and L ac C atarakou i— was a l ready ca lled On ta rio (vol . x x i. , p.
191— its first m en tion by that n am e in the R e l a tion s), and wou ld
be first reached from Mon trea l at the place known as Catarakou i ,
where Fort Fron ten ac was erected (ju ly, the site of the
pre sen t city of_ÇKingston . l T he n am e On tario m ean s , according to
m any writers , beau tiful lake .
”U pon this rendering, H ale rc
m arks : This , doubtless , is the m ean ing conveyed to an Iroquoisof the presen t day, un l ess he be longs to the Tuscarora tribe . B ut
there can be ‘
_
n c doubt that the te rm in a tion io (otherwise written z_
‘
yo,
iz‘
o , eeyo, etc . ) had origina lly the sen se ,not of be au tiful , ’ but of
grea t. ’
It is derived from the word wi_
‘
ya, which sigm fies in the
S eneca dia lect ‘good , ’
bu t in the Tuscarora ‘great. ’
On
ta r io is derived from the H u ron yau ta r e , cr on ta r e ,‘ lake
(Iroquois , on ia ta r e), with this term ination . It was not by any
N O TE S TO VOL . XL
m ean s the m ost be au tifu l of the lakes which they kn ew ; bu tit was to both of them em pha tically the great lake .
’
I r oquois
B ook of R ites (Phila . , p. 176.
A nother letter from Mother Marie , dated S ept . 6, 1653 , written tothe U rsu line supe rior at D ijon , gives a graphic:accoun t of the
even ts related in our text. A fter m en tion ing the m m ors , cu rren t
in the summ er , of Iroquois attacks , and the be lie f of the Fren chcolonists that these were false reports , she adds : B ut the reverendFather superior of the m ission s— a m an very z ealou s for the publicwe l fare , wh o considers it n ecessary to rem a in con tinua lly upon hisguard— l abored en e rgetica l ly to secure the fort ifica tion of that settl em ent of Three R ivers . This was contrary to the opin ion Zof theinhabitan ts of the place them selves ,— who , devoted to the ir ownpersonal afiairs , had no in clin ation to qu it these in order to labor onthe fortress . Notwithstanding the hindran ces encoun tered by theFather
_in his undertaking, the fortification s were com pleted , and al l
the inhabitants were protected from su dden attacks by the en em y.
H ardl y three weeks had passed , when 600 Iroquois (by whom wehad been threa ten ed) appea red, with the in ten tion of putt ing a l l tofire and sword , without sparing age or sex ,
— which they wou ld certa in l y have accom plished, if the place had been in the condition inwhich they expected to find it . A l l those who lived in the H uron
vi llage , be i ng inform ed of the en em y ’
s approach , imm ediate tookre fuge within the fort , and con sequen tly they , as well as the Fren ch ,escaped slaughter. So true is it that the Iroquois in tended toext erm in ate a l l and render them selves m asters of the place , tha tthey had brought their wives and children , and al l the ir baggage , inorder to establish them selves there .
”S ee R ichaudeau
’
s edition of
the L ettres , t. ii. , pp. 1 1—25.
9 (p. 2œ).— Con cem ing the u se of wam pum , see vol . viii. , note
70, and vol . xxvii. , n ote 24 ; of tobacco on cerem on îou s occasion s,
vol . vi. , n ote 2 5.
10 (p.— This passage , and a sim ilar statem en t
' by Marie de
n ote 8 , an te wou l d indicate that the jesu its hadan ticipated by twen ty years Frontenac ’
s plan of bu ilding a fort forthe con trol of L ake Ontario .